Мануал ямаха раптор 660

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yamaha Manuals
  4. Offroad Vehicle
  5. RAPTOR YFM660R

Manuals and User Guides for Yamaha RAPTOR YFM660R. We have 5 Yamaha RAPTOR YFM660R manuals available for free PDF download: Owner’s Manual, Course Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yamaha Manuals
  4. Offroad Vehicle
  5. RAPTOR YFM660RP
  6. Owner’s manual
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY!

It contains important safety information.

OWNER’S MANUAL

YFM660RP

WARNING

This ATV should not be ridden by anyone under 16 years of age.

LIT-11626-15-31

5LP-28199-11

loading

Related Manuals for Yamaha RAPTOR YFM660RP

Summary of Contents for Yamaha RAPTOR YFM660RP

  • Page 1
    READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY! It contains important safety information. OWNER’S MANUAL YFM660RP WARNING This ATV should not be ridden by anyone under 16 years of age. LIT-11626-15-31 5LP-28199-11…
  • Page 2
    EBU00776…
  • Page 3
    Yamaha experience in the production of fine sporting, touring, and pacesetting racing machines. With the purchase of this Yamaha, you can now appreciate the high degree of crafts- manship and reliability that have made Yamaha a leader in these fields. This manual will provide you with a good basic understanding of the features and operation of this machine.
  • Page 4: Warning

    EBU00801 IMPORTANT MANUAL INFORMATION FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE WARNINGS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following notations: The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED! Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe in- WARNING…

  • Page 5
    Please check your local riding laws and regulations before operating this machine. EBU00981 YFM660RP OWNER’S MANUAL ©2001 by Yamaha Motor Corporation, AFFIX DEALER U.S.A. 1st edition, July 2001 LABEL HERE All rights reserved.
  • Page 6: Table Of Contents

    EBU00014 CONTROL FUNCTIONS….4-1 WARNING Main switch ……..4-1 Indicates a potential hazard that could Indicator and warning lights …..4-2 result in serious injury or death. Handlebar switches ……4-4 Throttle lever ……..4-6 Speed limiter ……..4-7 CONTENTS Clutch lever ……..4-8 Brake lever……..4-8 Brake pedal……..4-9 LOCATION OF THE WARNING Parking brake………4-10 AND SPECIFICATION LABELS..

  • Page 7
    PRE-OPERATION CHECKS … 5-1 Engine break-in ……. 6-9 Front and rear brakes ….. 5-3 Parking……….. 6-10 Fuel ……….5-4 Parking on a slope……6-11 Engine oil ……..5-6 Accessories and loading ….6-12 Coolant……….5-7 Chain……….5-8 RIDING YOUR ATV ……7-1 Throttle lever ……..
  • Page 8
    PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND Parking brake adjustment….8-29 ADJUSTMENT……..8-1 Adjusting the rear brake light Owner’s manual and tool kit…. 8-1 switch ………..8-31 Periodic maintenance/ Clutch lever free play lubrication ……..8-3 adjustment ……..8-31 Panel removal and installation ..8-5 Drive chain slack check ….8-33 Engine oil and oil filter cartridge ..
  • Page 9
    Troubleshooting ……8-49 Troubleshooting charts ….8-50 CLEANING AND STORAGE…. 9-1 A. Cleaning……..9-1 B. Storage ……..9-3 SPECIFICATIONS……10-1 NOISE REGULATION….11-1 MAINTENANCE RECORD …. 12-1 ATV LIMITED WARRANTY … 13-1 YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.) ………. 14-1…
  • Page 10: Location Of The Warning And Specification Labels

    EBU00464 LOCATION OF THE WARNING AND SPECIFICATION LABELS…

  • Page 11
    ATV. Never remove any labels from your ATV. If a label becomes difficult to read or comes off, a replacement label is available from your Yamaha dealer. WARNING UNDER Operating this ATV if you are under the age of 16 increases your chance of severe injury or death.
  • Page 13: Safety Information

    EBU00924 SAFETY INFORMATION AN ATV IS NOT A TOY AND CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO OPERATE. An ATV handles differently from other vehicles including motorcycles and cars. A collision or rollover can occur quickly, even during routine maneuvers such as turning and riding on hills or over obstacles, if you fail to take proper precautions.

  • Page 14
    Always avoid operating an ATV on any paved surfaces, including sidewalks, driveways, park- ● ing lots and streets. ● Never operate an ATV on any public street, road or highway, even a dirt or gravel one. ● Never operate an ATV without wearing an approved motorcycle helmet that fits properly. You should also wear eye protection (goggles or face shield), gloves, boots, long-sleeved shirt or jacket, and long pants.
  • Page 15
    ● Always follow proper procedures for turning as described in this manual. Practice turning at low speeds before attempting to turn at faster speeds. Do not turn at excessive speed. Never operate the ATV on hills too steep for the ATV or for your abilities. Practice on smaller ●…
  • Page 16
    Always use proper procedures if you stall or roll backwards when climbing a hill. To avoid stall- ● ing, use proper gear and maintain a steady speed when climbing a hill. If you stall or roll back- wards, follow the special procedure for braking described in this manual. Dismount on the uphill side or to a side if pointed straight uphill.
  • Page 17
    ● Always use the size and type tires specified in this manual. Always maintain proper tire pressure as described in this manual. ● Never modify an ATV through improper installation or use of accessories. ● ● Never exceed the stated load capacity for an ATV. Cargo should be properly distributed and securely attached.
  • Page 18
    WARNING When transporting the ATV in another vehicle, be sure it is kept upright and POTENTIAL HAZARD that the fuel cock is in the “OFF” posi- Improper handling of gasoline. tion. Otherwise, fuel may leak out of the WHAT CAN HAPPEN carburetor or fuel tank.
  • Page 19
    WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Starting or running the engine in a closed area. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Exhaust fumes are poisonous and may cause loss of consciousness and death within a short time. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Always operate your ATV in an area with adequate ventilation.
  • Page 20: Description And Machine Identification

    EBU00032 DESCRIPTION AND MACHINE IDENTIFICATION 1. Spark arrester 10. Tail/brake light 2. Seat 11. Shift pedal 3. Fuel tank cap 12. Clutch lever 4. Engine oil tank 13. Handlebar switches 5. Brake pedal 14. Parking brake 6. Headlight 15. Main switch 7.

  • Page 21: Identification Number Records

    This number can be used for ordering a new when ordering spare parts from a Yamaha key. dealer or for reference in case the vehicle is stolen.

  • Page 22: Vehicle Identification Number

    Record the information on this la- bel in the space provided. This information will be needed to order spare parts from your Yamaha dealer. 1. Vehicle identification number NOTE: The vehicle identification number is used to 1.

  • Page 23: Control Functions

    EBU00039 CONTROL FUNCTIONS WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death. EBU00942 Main switch Functions of the respective switch positions are as follows: The engine can be started only at this position and the headlights and taillight come on when the light switch is on.

  • Page 24: Indicator And Warning Lights

    EBU00802 EBU00713 Indicator and warning lights Coolant temperature warning light “ ” When the coolant temperature reaches a specified level, this light comes on to warn that the coolant temperature is too hot. If the light comes on during operation, stop the en- gine as soon as it is safe to do so and allow the engine to cool down for about 10 minutes.

  • Page 25
    Coolant temperature Coolant temperature warning light comes on warning light does not momentarily. come on. Coolant temperature and electrical circuit are OK. Go Ask a Yamaha dealer to ahead with riding. inspect the electrical circuit.
  • Page 26: Handlebar Switches

    EBU00053 Handlebar switches CAUTION: Do not use the headlights with the engine turned off for more than thirty minutes. The battery may discharge to the point that the starter motor will not operate properly. If this should happen, remove the battery and recharge it. EBU00849 Engine stop switch “…

  • Page 27
    EBU00607 Start switch “ ” The starter motor cranks the engine when this switch is pushed. CAUTION: See starting instructions prior to starting the engine. (See page 6-1 for details.)
  • Page 28: Throttle Lever

    Check the operation of the throttle lever before you start the engine. If it does not work smoothly, check for the cause. Correct the problem before riding the ATV. Consult a Yamaha dealer if you 1. Throttle lever can’t find or solve the problem yourself.

  • Page 29: Speed Limiter

    EBU00066 Speed limiter WARNING The speed limiter keeps the throttle from fully POTENTIAL HAZARD opening, even when the throttle lever is Improper adjustment of the speed limit- pushed to the maximum. Screwing in the ad- er and throttle. juster limits the maximum engine power avail- WHAT CAN HAPPEN able and decreases the maximum speed of The throttle cable could be damaged.

  • Page 30: Clutch Lever

    EBU00069 EBU00988 Clutch lever Brake lever The clutch lever is located on the left handle- The brake lever is located on the right handle- bar and the ignition circuit cut-off system is in- bar. Pull it toward the handlebar to apply the corporated in the clutch lever holder.

  • Page 31: Brake Pedal

    EBU00989 Brake pedal The brake pedal is located on the right side of the machine. Push down on the pedal to apply the rear brake. 1. Brake pedal…

  • Page 32: Parking Brake

    EBU00080 Parking brake Use the parking brake when you have to start the engine or park the machine, especially on a slope. Squeeze the clutch lever while push- ing the button, then push in the lock plate to apply the parking brake. Squeeze the clutch lever to release the parking brake.

  • Page 33: Shift Pedal

    EBU00788 Shift pedal WARNING This machine is equipped with a constant- POTENTIAL HAZARD mesh 5-speed forward and 1-speed reverse Improper use of the parking brake. transmission. The shift pedal is located on the WHAT CAN HAPPEN left side of the engine and is used in combina- The ATV could start moving unexpect- tion with the clutch when shifting.

  • Page 34: Reverse Knob

    EBU00747* EBU00092 Reverse knob “REV” Fuel tank cap The reverse knob is used to shift into reverse Remove the fuel tank cap by turning it coun- gear. terclockwise. Refer to the “Reverse knob operation and re- verse driving” section (page 6-5) before oper- ating this machine in reverse gear.

  • Page 35: Fuel Cock

    EBU00093 Fuel cock The fuel cock supplies fuel from the fuel tank to the carburetor. The fuel cock has three positions. OFF: With the lever in this position, fuel will not flow. Always turn the lever to this position when the engine is not running. ON: With the lever in this position, fuel flows to the carburetor.

  • Page 36: Starter (Choke)

    EBU00095 EBU01010 Starter (choke) “ ” Seat Starting a cold engine requires a richer air-fuel To remove the seat, insert your hand between mixture. A separate starter circuit supplies this the rear of the seat and the rear fender, pull mixture.

  • Page 37
    To install the seat, insert the projections on the front of the seat into the seat holders and push down on the seat at the rear. NOTE: Make sure that the seat is securely fitted. 1. Projection (× 2) 2. Seat holder (× 2) 4-15…
  • Page 38: Front Shock Absorber Adjustment

    HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Always adjust the shock absorbers on the left and right side to the same set- ting. 1. Adjusting ring NOTE: A special wrench can be obtained at a Yamaha dealer. 4-16…

  • Page 39: Rear Shock Absorber Adjustment

    Yamaha dealer. Do not deform or damage the cylinder ● in any way. ● Do not dispose of a damaged or worn out shock absorber yourself. Take the unit to a Yamaha dealer. 4-17…

  • Page 40
    3. The length of the spring (installed) 4. Tighten the locknut to the specified changes 1.5 mm (0.06 in) per turn of the torque. adjusting nut. Tightening torque: Measurement A: 42 Nm (4.2 m·kgf, 30 ft·lb) Installed length: CAUTION: Minimum (hard): 232 mm (9.1 in) Always tighten the locknut against the Standard:…
  • Page 41
    Adjust the rebound damping force as follows. Adjust the compression damping force as fol- Turn the rebound damping force adjusting lows. screw in direction a to increase the rebound Turn the compression damping force adjust- damping force and in direction b to decrease ing screw in direction a to increase the com- pression damping force and in direction b to the rebound damping force.
  • Page 42: Specifications

    CAUTION: WARNING Never turn an adjusting mechanism be- POTENTIAL HAZARD yond the minimum and maximum settings. Suspension components become hot during operation. NOTE: WHAT CAN HAPPEN Although the total number of clicks of a damp- You could be burned. ing force adjusting mechanism may not exact- HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD ly match the above specifications due to small Never touch the compression damping…

  • Page 43: Pre-Operation Checks

    PRE-OPERATION CHECKS Before using this machine, check the following points: ITEM ROUTINE PAGE • Check operation, free play, fluid level and fluid leakage. 5-3 ~ 5-4, Front brake • Fill with DOT 4 brake fluid if necessary. 8-24 ~ 8-27 •…

  • Page 44
    WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Failure to inspect the ATV before oper- ating. Failure to properly maintain the ATV. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Increases the possibility of an accident or equipment damage. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Always inspect your ATV each time you use it to make sure the ATV is in safe op- erating condition.
  • Page 45: Front And Rear Brakes

    ● Check that there is no free play in the brake the brakes firmly for one minute. If there is lever. If there is free play, have a Yamaha any leaking, have the machine inspected dealer adjust it. by a Yamaha dealer.

  • Page 46: Fuel

    Yamaha dealer. system. Your Yamaha engine has been designed to use regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number ([R+M]/2) of 86 or higher, or research octane number of 91 or higher. If knocking or pinging occurs, use a different brand of gasoline or premium unleaded fuel.

  • Page 47
    Fuel can spill, which can cause a fire hol containing methanol is not recommended and severe injury. by Yamaha because it may cause fuel system Fuel expands when it heats up. If the damage or vehicle performance problems. fuel tank is overfilled, fuel could spill out due to heat from the engine or the sun.
  • Page 48: Engine Oil

    EBU00914 Engine oil CAUTION: Make sure the engine oil is at the specified Be sure to use motor oils that do not con- level. Add oil as necessary. (See page 8-6.) tain anti-friction modifiers. Passenger car motor oils (often labeled “ENERGY Recommended oil: CONSERVING II”) contain anti-friction ad-…

  • Page 49: Coolant

    EBU00496 Coolant WARNING Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank POTENTIAL HAZARD when the engine is cold. (The coolant level will Removing the radiator cap when the en- vary with engine temperature.) The coolant gine and radiator are still hot. level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL”…

  • Page 50: Chain

    Repair as necessary for proper operation. EBU00152 Fittings and Fasteners Always check the tightness of chassis fittings and fasteners before a ride. Take the machine to a Yamaha dealer or refer to the Service Manual for correct tightening torque.

  • Page 51: Tires

    The following are minimums: 1. The tires listed below have been ap- Front 24.5 kPa (0.245 kgf/cm , 3.5 psi) proved by Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. Rear 24.5 kPa (0.245 kgf/cm , 3.5 psi) for this model. Other tire combina- tions are not recommended.

  • Page 52: How To Measure Tire Pressure

    Set pressure with tires cold. 4. Use no more than the following Set tire pressures to the following specifica- pressures when seating the tire tions: beads. Front 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm , 36 psi) Recommended Minimum Maximum pressure Rear 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm , 36 psi) Higher pressures may cause the 27.5 kPa…

  • Page 53: Tire Wear Limit

    EBU00160 Tire wear limit When the tire groove decreases to 3 mm (0.12 in) due to wear, replace the tire. a. 3 mm (0.12 in) 5-11…

  • Page 54: Operation

    2. Turn the fuel cock to “ON”. there is a control or function you do not 3. Turn the main switch to “ON” and the en- understand, ask your Yamaha dealer. gine stop switch to “ ”. 4. Shift the transmission into neutral.

  • Page 55
    When the transmission is in neutral. The neutral indicator light should come on. If the light does not come on, ask a Yamaha dealer to inspect it. When the clutch is disengaged with the ● transmission in any position. However, it is recommended to shift into neutral be- fore starting the engine.
  • Page 56
    NOTE: CAUTION: If the engine fails to start, release the start See the “Engine break-in” section prior to switch, then push it again. Pause a few sec- operating engine for the first time. onds before the next attempt. Each cranking should be as short as possible to preserve battery energy.
  • Page 57: Starting A Warm Engine

    EBU00180 Starting a warm engine To start a warm engine, refer to the “Starting a cold engine” section. The starter (choke) should not be used. The throttle should be opened slightly. EBU00538 Warming up To get maximum engine life, always warm up the engine before starting off.

  • Page 58: Reverse Knob Operation And Reverse Driving

    If the light does not come on, 2. While applying the rear brake pedal, turn ask a Yamaha dealer to inspect the machine. the reverse knob clockwise with your right hand. 4. Check behind you for people or obsta- 3.

  • Page 59: Shifting

    EBU00199 Shifting WARNING This model has a 5-speed forward and 1-speed POTENTIAL HAZARD reverse transmission. The transmission allows Improperly operating in reverse. you to control the amount of power you have WHAT CAN HAPPEN available at a given speed or for starting, accel- You could hit an obstacle or person be- erating, climbing hills, etc.

  • Page 60: To Start Out And Accelerate

    EBU00203 To start out and accelerate: CAUTION: 1. Release the throttle lever. ● Do not coast for long periods with the engine off, and do not tow the ma- CAUTION: chine a long distance. Even in neutral Always close the throttle while shifting position, the transmission is only gears.

  • Page 61: To Decelerate

    EBU00207 8. Follow the same procedure when shifting To decelerate: to the next higher gear. When slowing down or stopping, release the throttle and apply the brakes smoothly and WARNING evenly. As you slow down, shift to a lower POTENTIAL HAZARD gear.

  • Page 62: Engine Break-In

    Because the engine is If any abnormality is noticed during this peri- brand new, you must not put an excessive od, consult a Yamaha dealer. load on it for the first several hours of running. 1. 0 ~ 10 hours:…

  • Page 63: Parking

    EBU00211 Parking When parking, stop the engine and shift into neutral. Turn the fuel cock to “OFF” and apply the parking brake. 1. Locked position 1. Button 2. Lock plate 6-10…

  • Page 64: Parking On A Slope

    EBU00992 Parking on a slope 1. Bring the machine to a stop by applying the brakes in low gear. WARNING 2. Stop the engine and release the clutch POTENTIAL HAZARD lever. Parking on a hill or other incline. 3. With the front and rear brakes applied, WHAT CAN HAPPEN apply the parking brake and slowly re- The ATV could roll out of control, in-…

  • Page 65: Accessories And Loading

    Choose only accessories designed for your ● Use extra caution when riding an ATV with ATV. Your Yamaha dealer has a variety of accessories. The ATV may handle differ- genuine Yamaha accessories. Other ac- ently than it does without accessories.

  • Page 66
    EBU00584 Loading ● Tie down cargo securely to the carriers. As originally equipped, this ATV is not de- Make sure cargo in the trailer cannot move signed to carry cargo or tow a trailer. If you around. A shifting load can cause an acci- choose to add accessories so that you can dent.
  • Page 67
    WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Overloading this ATV or carrying or tow- ing cargo improperly. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Could cause changes in vehicle han- dling which could lead to an accident. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Never exceed the stated load capacity for this ATV.
  • Page 68
    EBU00929 WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death. 6-15…
  • Page 69
    R iding Your…
  • Page 71: Getting To Know Your Atv

    WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR ATV the operation of the controls. Pay particular at- This ATV is intended for recreational use by tention to the safety information on pages 2-1 experienced operators only.

  • Page 72: Ride With Care And Good Judgement

    JUDGEMENT Beginning and inexperienced operators should complete the certified training Get training if you are inexperienced. course offered by Yamaha. They should Beginners should get training from a certified then regularly practice the skills learned instructor. in the course and the operating tech- Become familiar with this ATV at slow speeds niques described in this Owner’s Manu-…

  • Page 73
    Not recommended for children under 16 years of age. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Failure to follow the age recommenda- tions for this ATV. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Use by children of ATVs that are not rec- ommended for their age can lead to se- vere injury or death of the child.
  • Page 74
    This ATV is designed to carry operator only — passengers prohibited. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Carrying a passenger on this ATV. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Greatly reduces your ability to balance and control this ATV. Could cause an accident, resulting in harm to you and/ or your passenger.
  • Page 75
    Apparel Operating without protective clothing WARNING increases your chances of severe injury in the event of an accident. POTENTIAL HAZARD HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Operating this ATV without wearing an Always wear an approved motorcycle approved motorcycle helmet, eye pro- helmet that fits properly.
  • Page 76
    Do not operate after consuming alcohol or WARNING drugs. POTENTIAL HAZARD Operator’s performance capability is reduced Operating this ATV after consuming al- by the influence of alcohol or drugs. cohol or drugs. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Could seriously affect your judgment. Could cause you to react more slowly.
  • Page 77
    Pre-operation checks WARNING Always perform the pre-operation checks list- POTENTIAL HAZARD ed on page 5-1 before riding for safety and Operating this ATV with improper tires, proper care of the ATV. or with improper or uneven tire pres- WARNING sure. POTENTIAL HAZARD WHAT CAN HAPPEN Failure to inspect the ATV before oper-…
  • Page 78
    Speed limiter WARNING For riders inexperienced with this model, this Indicates a potential hazard that could model is equipped with a speed limiter in the result in serious injury or death. throttle lever housing. The speed limiter limits the power and top speed of the ATV. Turning Do not operate at speeds too fast for your the screw in decreases top speed, and turning skills or the conditions.
  • Page 79
    Loading and accessories WARNING Use extra caution when riding the ATV with POTENTIAL HAZARD additional loads, such as accessories or car- Overloading this ATV or carrying or tow- go. The ATV’s handling may be adversely af- ing cargo improperly. fected. Reduce your speed when adding WHAT CAN HAPPEN additional loads.
  • Page 80
    During operation WARNING Always keep your feet on the footboards dur- POTENTIAL HAZARD ing operation. Otherwise your feet may con- Removing hands from handlebars or tact the rear wheels. feet from footboards during operation. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Removing even one hand or foot can re- duce your ability to control the ATV or could cause you to lose your balance and fall off of the ATV.
  • Page 81
    Avoid wheelies and jumping. You may lose control of the ATV or overturn. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Attempting wheelies, jumps, and other stunts. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Increases the chance of an accident, in- cluding an overturn. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Never attempt stunts, such as wheelies or jumps.
  • Page 82
    Never modify this ATV through improp- er installation or use of accessories. All parts and accessories added to this ve- hicle should be genuine Yamaha or equivalent components designed for use on this ATV and should be installed and used according to instructions. If you have questions, consult an autho- rized ATV dealer.
  • Page 83
    Exhaust system The exhaust system on the ATV is very hot during and following operation. To prevent burns, avoid touching the exhaust system. Park the ATV in a place where pedestrians or children are not likely to touch it. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Hot exhaust system.
  • Page 84: Be Careful Where You Ride

    BE CAREFUL WHERE YOU RIDE This ATV is designed for off-road use only. Riding on paved surfaces can cause loss of control. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Operating this ATV on paved surfaces. WHAT CAN HAPPEN ATVs are designed for off-road use only. Paved surfaces may seriously affect handling and control of the ATV, and may cause the vehicle to go out of con-…

  • Page 85
    Do not ride on any public road, street, or high- way. Riding on public roads can result in colli- sions with other vehicles. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Operating this ATV on public streets, roads or highways. WHAT CAN HAPPEN You can collide with another vehicle. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Never operate this ATV on any public street, road or highway, even a dirt or…
  • Page 86
    Know the terrain where you ride. Ride cau- tiously in unfamiliar areas. Stay alert for holes, rocks, or roots in the terrain, and oth- er hidden hazards which may cause the ATV to upset. WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Failure to use extra care when operating this ATV on unfamiliar terrain.
  • Page 87
    WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Failure to use extra care when operating on excessively rough, slippery or loose terrain. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Could cause loss of traction or vehicle control, which could result in an acci- dent, including an overturn. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Do not operate on excessively rough, slippery or loose terrain until you have learned and practiced the skills neces-…
  • Page 88
    When riding in an area where you might not WHAT CAN HAPPEN easily be seen, such as desert terrain, mount You could be in a collision. You could a caution flag on the ATV. DO NOT use the be injured. flag pole bracket as a trailer hitch.
  • Page 89
    Select a large, flat area off-road to become fa- With the engine idling, pull the clutch lever to miliar with your ATV. Make sure that this area disengage the clutch and shift into 1st gear, is free of obstacles and other riders. You and then release the parking brake.
  • Page 90
    When slowing down or stopping, release the WARNING throttle and apply the brakes smoothly and POTENTIAL HAZARD evenly. As you slow down, shift to a lower Opening the throttle abruptly or releas- gear. Be sure that the engine has sufficiently ing the clutch lever to quickly.
  • Page 91: Turning Your Atv

    TURNING YOUR ATV HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD To achieve maximum traction while riding off- Always follow proper procedures for road, the two rear wheels are mounted solidly turning as described in this Owner’s on one axle and turn together at the same Manual.

  • Page 92
    Once you have learned this technique you should be able to perform it at higher speeds or in tighter curves. Improper riding procedures such as abrupt throttle changes, excessive braking, incorrect body movements, or too much speed for the sharpness of the turn may cause the ATV to tip.
  • Page 93: Climbing Uphill

    CLIMBING UPHILL HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Use proper riding techniques to avoid vehicle Never operate the ATV on hills too steep overturns on hills. Be sure that you can ma- for the ATV or for your abilities. neuver your ATV well on flat ground before at- Practice on smaller hills before attempt- tempting any incline and then practice riding ing large hills.

  • Page 94
    WARNING An obstacle, a sharp drop, or another vehicle or person could be on the other POTENTIAL HAZARD side of the hill. Climbing hills improperly. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Could cause loss of control or cause the ATV to overturn. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Always follow proper procedures for climbing hills as described in this Own- er’s Manual.
  • Page 95
    If you are climbing a hill and you find that you When crossing the side of a hill: have not properly judged your ability to make Always follow proper procedures as de- it to the top, you should turn the ATV around scribed in the Owner’s Manual.
  • Page 96
    If your ATV has stalled or stopped and you WARNING believe you can continue up the hill, restart POTENTIAL HAZARD carefully to make sure you do not lift the front Stalling, rolling backwards or improper- wheels which could cause you to lose control. ly dismounting while climbing a hill.
  • Page 97
    Dismount on uphill side or to a side if pointed straight uphill. Turn the ATV around and remount, following the pro- cedure described in the Owner’s Manual. 7-29…
  • Page 98: Riding Downhill

    RIDING DOWNHILL WARNING When riding your ATV downhill, shift your POTENTIAL HAZARD weight as far to the rear and uphill side of the Going down a hill improperly. ATV as possible. Move back on the seat and WHAT CAN HAPPEN sit with your arms straight.

  • Page 99
    7-31…
  • Page 100: Crossing A Slope

    CROSSING A SLOPE WARNING Traversing a sloping surface on your ATV re- POTENTIAL HAZARD quires you to properly position your weight to Improperly crossing hills or turning on maintain proper balance. Be sure that you hills. have learned the basic riding skills on flat WHAT CAN HAPPEN ground before attempting to cross a sloping Could cause loss of control or cause the…

  • Page 101
    Avoid hills with excessively slippery or loose surfaces. Shift your weight to the uphill side of the ATV. 7-33…
  • Page 102: Crossing Through Shallow Water

    CROSSING THROUGH SHALLOW WATER Remember that wet brakes may have re- The ATV can be used to cross slow moving, duced stopping ability. Test your brakes shallow water of up to a maximum of 35 cm after leaving water. If necessary, apply (14 inches) in depth.

  • Page 103
    Test your brakes after leaving the water. Do CAUTION: not continue to ride your ATV without verifying After riding your ATV in water, be sure to that you have regained proper braking ability. drain the trapped water by removing the check hose at the bottom of the air filter case.
  • Page 104: Riding Over Rough Terrain

    RIDING OVER ROUGH TERRAIN WARNING Riding over rough terrain should be done with POTENTIAL HAZARD caution. Look out for obstacles which could Improperly operating over obstacles. cause damage to the ATV or could lead to an WHAT CAN HAPPEN upset or accident. Be sure to keep your feet Could cause loss of control or a colli- firmly mounted on the footboards at all times.

  • Page 105
    7-37…
  • Page 106: Sliding And Skidding

    SLIDING AND SKIDDING If the rear wheels of your ATV start to slide Care should be used when riding on loose or sideways, control can usually be regained (if slippery surfaces since the ATV may slide. If there is room to do so) by steering in the direc- unexpected and uncorrected, sliding could tion of the slide.

  • Page 107
    With practice, over a period of time, skill at WARNING controlled sliding can be developed. The ter- POTENTIAL HAZARD rain should be chosen carefully before at- Skidding or sliding improperly. tempting such maneuvers, since both stability WHAT CAN HAPPEN and control are reduced. Bear in mind that You may lose control of this ATV.
  • Page 108: What To Do If

    WHAT TO DO IF … ● If your ATV starts to slide sideways: This section is designed to be a reference Steer in the direction of the slide if you have guide only. Be sure to read each section on the room.

  • Page 109
    If your ATV is traversing a sloping surface: ● Be sure to ride with your weight positioned towards the uphill side of the ATV to main- tain proper balance. If the ATV starts to tip, steer down the hill (if there are no obstacles in your way) to regain balance.
  • Page 110: Periodic Maintenance And Adjustment

    EBU00515 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND Have a Yamaha dealer perform service if ADJUSTMENT you are not familiar with machine ser- vice. Periodic inspection, adjustment and lubrica- tion will keep your machine in the safest and most efficient condition possible. Safety is an EBU00257 obligation of the machine owner.

  • Page 111
    HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD during a service operation requiring one, take Never modify this ATV through improp- your machine to a Yamaha dealer to check er installation or use of accessories. All the torque settings and adjust them as neces- parts and accessories added to this ve- sary.
  • Page 112: Periodic Maintenance/Lubrication

    EBU00261 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INITIAL EVERY ITEM ROUTINE month months months months year • Check valve clearance. Valves* • Adjust if necessary. • Check coolant leakage. Cooling system • Repair if necessary. • Replace coolant every 24 months. • Check condition. Spark plug •…

  • Page 113
    • Lubricate every 6 months.** • Check all chassis fittings and fasteners. Fittings and fasteners* • Correct if necessary. It is recommended that these items be serviced by a Yamaha dealer. ** Lithium-soap-based grease NOTE: • Recommended brake fluid: DOT4 •…
  • Page 114: Panel Removal And Installation

    EBU00807 EBU01013 Panel removal and installation Panel A 1. Panel A 1. Panel A 2. Bolt (× 2) The panel illustrated needs to be removed to To remove perform some of the maintenance described Remove the bolts, and then take the panel off. in this chapter.

  • Page 115: Engine Oil And Oil Filter Cartridge

    EBU01014 Engine oil and oil filter cartridge 3. Wait a few minutes until the oil settles, re- The engine oil level should be checked before move the engine oil tank filler cap, wipe each ride. In addition, the oil must be changed the dipstick clean with a clean rag, insert and the oil filter cartridge replaced at the inter- it back into the filler hole (without screw-…

  • Page 116
    4. If the engine oil is below the minimum To change the engine oil (with or without level mark, add sufficient oil of the recom- oil filter cartridge replacement) mended type to raise it to the correct lev- NOTE: When adding oil, be careful not to overfill the engine oil tank;…
  • Page 117
    4. Remove the crankcase engine oil drain bolt. 1. Engine oil tank drain bolt 5. Remove the engine oil tank filler cap and the oil tank drain bolt. 1. Crankcase engine oil drain bolt 6. Check the washers for damage, and re- place if necessary.
  • Page 118
    9. Install a new oil filter cartridge and tighten NOTE: it to the specified torque with a torque An oil filter wrench is available at a nearby wrench. Yamaha dealer. Tightening torque: Oil filter cartridge: 17 Nm (1.7 m·kgf, 12 ft·lb)
  • Page 119
    10. Install the crankcase engine oil drain bolt CAUTION: and the engine oil tank drain bolt, then ● In order to prevent clutch slippage tighten them to the specified torques. (since the engine oil also lubricates Tightening torques: the clutch), do not mix any chemical Crankcase engine oil drain bolt: additives with the oil or use oils of a 30 Nm (3.0 m·kgf, 22 ft·lb)
  • Page 120: Cooling System

    You may use soft water if you can’t marks. get distilled water. NOTE: If water is added, have a Yamaha dealer ● check the antifreeze content of the cool- ant as soon as possible. ●…

  • Page 121: Changing The Coolant

    EBU01016 Changing the coolant 1. Place the ATV on a level surface. 2. Remove panel A. (See page 8-5 for pan- WARNING el removal and installation procedures.) POTENTIAL HAZARD 3. Place a container under the engine, and Removing the radiator cap when the en- then remove the coolant drain bolt.

  • Page 122
    4. Remove the radiator cap. 5. Remove the coolant reservoir cap. 6. Disconnect the hose on the coolant res- ervoir side, and then drain the coolant from the coolant reservoir. 1. Radiator cap 1. Coolant reservoir cap 2. Hose 7. After draining the coolant, thoroughly flush the cooling system with clean tap water.
  • Page 123
    1.3 L (1.14 Imp qt, 1.37 US qt) NOTE: Coolant reservoir capacity: If any leakage is found, have a Yamaha deal- 0.29 L (0.26 Imp qt, 0.31 US qt) er check the cooling system. 16. Install the panel.
  • Page 124: Spark Plug Inspection

    ATV that is being ridden normally. Do not attempt to diagnose such problems yourself. Instead, take the ATV to a Yamaha dealer. You should periodically remove and inspect the spark plug because heat and deposits will cause the spark plug to slowly break down and erode.

  • Page 125
    Installation Tightening torque: 1. Measure the electrode gap with a wire Spark plug: thickness gauge and, if necessary, adjust 17.5 Nm (1.75 m·kgf, 12.7 ft·lb) the gap to specification. NOTE: Spark plug gap: If a torque wrench is not available when you 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.03 ~ 0.04 in) are installing a spark plug, a good estimate of the correct torque is 1/4 to 1/2 turn past finger…
  • Page 126: Air Filter Element Cleaning

    EBU00792 Air filter element cleaning NOTE: There is a check hose at the bottom of the air filter case. If dust or water collects in this hose, empty the hose and clean the air filter element and air filter case. 1.

  • Page 127
    WARNING POTENTIAL HAZARD Using low flash point solvents or gaso- line to clean the air filter element. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Low flash point solvents or gasoline can catch fire or explode. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Use parts cleaning solvent to clean the 1.
  • Page 128
    7. Apply Yamaha foam air filter oil or other NOTE: The air filter element should be cleaned every quality foam air filter oil to the element. If foam air filter oil is not available, motor oil 20 ~ 40 hours. It should be cleaned and lubri- cated more often if the machine is operated in may be used.
  • Page 129: Spark Arrester Cleaning

    EBU00780 Spark arrester cleaning 2. Remove the tailpipe by pulling it out of Be sure the exhaust pipe and muffler are cool the muffler. before cleaning the spark arrester. 3. Tap the tailpipe lightly, then use a wire 1. Remove the bolt. brush to remove any carbon deposits from the spark arrester portion of the tailpipe.

  • Page 130: Carburetor Adjustment

    The carburetor is a vital part of the engine and POTENTIAL HAZARD requires very sophisticated adjustment. Most Improper cleaning of the spark arrester. adjusting should be left to a Yamaha dealer Hot exhaust system who has the professional knowledge and ex- WHAT CAN HAPPEN perience to do so.

  • Page 131: Idle Speed Adjustment

    EBU00301 Idle speed adjustment NOTE: A diagnostic tachometer must be used for this procedure. 1. Start the engine and warm it up for a few minutes at approximately 1,000 to 2,000 r/min. Occasionally rev the engine to 4,000 to 5,000 r/min. The engine is warm when it quickly responds to the 1.

  • Page 132: Valve Clearance Adjustment

    This adjust- ment however, should be left to a professional 1. Loosen the locknut. Yamaha service technician. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt until the throttle le- ver free play is 3 ~ 5 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in).

  • Page 133: Front And Rear Brake Pad Inspection

    Apply the brake and inspect the wear indicators grooves. If the pad is worn to the point that the wear indicator grooves are al- most in contact with the disc plate, ask a Yamaha dealer to replace the pads. 1. Wear indicator groove Front EBU01017…

  • Page 134
    Rear 1. Reservoir cover 2. Bolt (× 2) 1. Minimum level mark Observe these precautions: Front When checking the fluid level, make sure ● the top of the brake fluid reservoir is level. ● Use only the designated quality brake fluid. Otherwise, the rubber seals may deterio- rate, causing leakage and poor brake per- formance.
  • Page 135: Brake Fluid Replacement

    Always clean up spilled You could lose braking ability, which fluid immediately. could lead to an accident. ● Have a Yamaha dealer check the cause if HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD the brake fluid level goes down. After servicing: ●…

  • Page 136: Front Brake Adjustment

    The front brake lever should have a free play POTENTIAL HAZARD of 0 mm (0.0 in) at the lever end. If not, ask a Operating with improperly serviced or Yamaha dealer to adjust it. adjusted brakes. WHAT CAN HAPPEN You could lose braking ability, which could lead to an accident.

  • Page 137: Rear Brake Adjustment

    Operating with improperly serviced or tioned 4 mm (0.16 in) below the top of the adjusted brakes. footrest. If not, ask a Yamaha dealer to adjust WHAT CAN HAPPEN You could lose braking ability, which could lead to an accident.

  • Page 138: Parking Brake Adjustment

    If the cable cannot be adjusted to specifica- 1. Locknut 2. Adjusting bolt tion, consult a Yamaha dealer. 2. Loosen the adjusting bolt locknut and the adjusting bolt on the rear brake caliper. 4. Tighten the adjusting bolt locknut on the clutch lever.

  • Page 139
    5. Screw in the adjusting bolt on the brake WARNING caliper by hand until it feels tight, then POTENTIAL HAZARD screw it out 1/8 turn. Tighten the adjust- Operating with improperly adjusted ing bolt locknut to the specified torque. brakes. Tightening torque: WHAT CAN HAPPEN The brakes could malfunction, causing…
  • Page 140: Adjusting The Rear Brake Light Switch

    EBU00833 EBU00741 Adjusting the rear brake light switch Clutch lever free play adjustment The rear brake light switch, which is activated The clutch lever free play should be adjusted by the brake pedal and brake lever, is proper- to 5 ~ 10 mm (0.20 ~ 0.39 in). ly adjusted when the brake light comes on just 1.

  • Page 141
    6. Loosen the locknut at the crankcase side. 7. Turn the adjusting nut at the crankcase in direction a to increase the free play or in direction b to decrease the free play. 8. Tighten the locknut at the crankcase and the clutch lever.
  • Page 142: Drive Chain Slack Check

    EBU00350 EBU00917 Drive chain slack check Drive chain slack adjustment Inspect the drive chain while all tires are 1. Loosen the rear wheel hub upper and touching the ground. Check the slack at the lower nuts. position shown in the figure. The normal verti- cal deflection is approximately 27 ~ 37 mm (1.1 ~ 1.5 in).

  • Page 143
    There are alignment marks on each side of Tightening torque: the swingarm and on the hub. Use them to Locknut: check for proper wheel axle alignment. 16 Nm (1.6 m·kgf, 12 ft·lb) Upper wheel hub nut: 90 Nm (9.0 m·kgf, 65 ft·lb) Lower wheel hub nut: 90 Nm (9.0 m·kgf, 65 ft·lb) 1.
  • Page 144: Lubricating The Drive Chain

    EBU00805 Lubricating the drive chain 1. Clean the drive chain with kerosene and The drive chain must be cleaned and lubricat- a small soft brush. ed at the intervals specified in the periodic CAUTION: maintenance and lubrication chart, otherwise To prevent damaging the O-rings, do not it will quickly wear out, especially when riding in dusty or wet areas.

  • Page 145: Cable Inspection And Lubrication

    WARNING Yamaha dealer to replace them. POTENTIAL HAZARD Damaged control cables. Recommended lubricant: Yamaha chain and cable lube or WHAT CAN HAPPEN Corrosion can result when the outer SAE 10W30 motor oil covering of control cables becomes damaged. Cables can also become EBU00737 frayed or kinked.

  • Page 146: Front Upper And Lower Arm Pivot Lubrication

    EBU01018 Front upper and lower arm pivot Right side lubrication Lubricate the upper and lower arm pivots. Recommended lubricant: Lithium-soap-based grease Left side 1. Upper 2. Lower 1. Upper 2. Lower 8-37…

  • Page 147: Rear Arm Pivot Lubrication

    EBU01019 Rear arm pivot lubrication Lubricate the rear arm pivot. Recommended lubricant: Lithium-soap-based grease 8-38…

  • Page 148: Wheel Removal

    EBU00373 Wheel removal Rear 1. Elevate the wheel by placing a suitable stand under the frame. 2. Remove the nuts from the wheel. 3. Remove the wheel assembly. Front 1. Nut (× 4) 1. Nut (× 4) 8-39…

  • Page 149: Wheel Installation

    EBU00782 Wheel installation Rear When installing a wheel, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: ● When installing a front wheel, the arrow mark on the tire must point toward the rotating direction of the wheel. When installing a rear wheel, the wording ●…

  • Page 150: Battery

    Keep out of reach of chil- tery. If the battery seems to have discharged, dren. consult a Yamaha dealer. Antidote: EXTERNAL: Flush with water. CAUTION: INTERNAL: Drink large quantities of wa- Do not try to remove the sealing caps of ter or milk.

  • Page 151: Battery Maintenance

    Then turn on the switch- es. If the fuse immediately blows again, CAUTION: consult a Yamaha dealer. A special battery charger (constant volt- Specified fuse: 20 A age/ampere or constant voltage) is re-…

  • Page 152: Replacing A Headlight Bulb

    EBU01020 Replacing a headlight bulb WARNING 1. Remove the headlight assembly by re- POTENTIAL HAZARD moving the bolts. Using an improper fuse. WHAT CAN HAPPEN An improper fuse can cause damage to the electrical system which could lead to a fire. HOW TO AVOID THE HAZARD Always use a fuse of the specified rat- ing.

  • Page 153
    2. Disconnect the headlight coupler. 3. Remove the screw. 1. Headlight coupler 1. Screw 4. Remove the headlight cover from the headlight assembly. 8-44…
  • Page 154
    NOTE: 5. Remove the screw and pull the headlight Pull outward on the rear of the headlight unit, unit out from its case. and then pull outward on the front. 6. Remove the headlight bulb holder cover. 1. Screw 1. Headlight bulb holder cover 1.
  • Page 155
    7. Push the headlight bulb holder inward, WARNING turn it counterclockwise and remove the POTENTIAL HAZARD defective bulb. A headlight bulb is hot when it is on and immediately after it is turned off. WHAT CAN HAPPEN You can be burned, or a fire could start if the bulb touches something flamma- ble.
  • Page 156
    12. Connect the headlight coupler. 13. Install the headlight assembly in the orig- inal position and tighten the bolts. 14. Have a Yamaha dealer adjust the head- light beam if necessary. 1. Headlight bulb 2. Headlight bulb holder 9.
  • Page 157: Tail/Brake Light Bulb Replacement

    EBU01021 Tail/brake light bulb replacement 1. Remove the screws and the lens. 1. Bulb 3. Install a new bulb by pushing it inward and turning it clockwise. 1. Lens 2. Screw (× 2) 4. Install the lens and tighten the screws. 2.

  • Page 158: Troubleshooting

    EBU00412 Troubleshooting WARNING Although Yamaha machines receive a rigid in- POTENTIAL HAZARD spection before shipment from the factory, Checking the fuel system while smok- trouble may occur during operation. Any prob- ing or near an open flame. lem in the fuel, compression, or ignition sys-…

  • Page 159: Troubleshooting Charts

    No fuel. 2. Compression There is compression. Compression normal. Use the electric starter to see if there is compression. Ask a Yamaha dealer to No compression. inspect. 3. Ignition Wipe clean with dry cloth. Ignition system is Spark is good.

  • Page 160: Engine Overheating

    Restart the engine. If the engine overheats again, ask a Level is OK. Yamaha dealer to inspect and/or repair the cooling system. NOTE: If it is difficult to get the recommended coolant, tap water can be temporarily used, provided that it is changed to the recommended coolant as soon as possible.

  • Page 161: Cleaning And Storage

    EBU00417 CLEANING AND STORAGE CAUTION: Excessive water pressure may cause wa- A. CLEANING ter seepage and deterioration of wheel Frequent, thorough cleaning of your machine bearings, brakes, transmission seals and will not only enhance its appearance but will electrical devices. Many expensive repair improve its general performance and extend bills have resulted from improper high the useful life of many components.

  • Page 162
    7. Clean the seat with a vinyl upholstery WARNING cleaner to keep the cover pliable and POTENTIAL HAZARD glossy. Operation with wet brakes after wash- 8. Automotive type wax may be applied to ing. all painted and chrome plated surfaces. WHAT CAN HAPPEN Avoid combination cleaner-waxes.
  • Page 163: Storage

    Do not apply oil to NOTE: any rubber parts or the seat cover. Use of fuel stabilizer and conditioner elimi- nates the need to drain the fuel system. Con- sult a Yamaha dealer if the fuel system needs to be drained instead.

  • Page 164
    8. Remove the battery and charge it. Store it in a dry place and recharge it once a month. Do not store the battery in an ex- cessively warm or cold place (less than 0°C (30°F) or more than 30°C (90°F)). NOTE: Make any necessary repairs before storing the machine.
  • Page 165: Specifications

    EBU00428 SPECIFICATIONS MODEL YFM660R Dimension: Overall length 1,830 mm ( 72 in) Overall width 1,100 mm ( 43.3 in) Overall height 1,150 mm ( 45.3 in) Seat height 860 mm ( 33.9 in) Wheel base 1,245 mm ( 49 in) Ground clearance 265 mm ( 10.4 in) Minimum turning radius…

  • Page 166
    MODEL YFM660R Engine oil: 0˚ 90˚ 110˚ 130˚F 10˚ 30˚ 50˚ 70˚ Type YAMALUBE 4 (20W40) or SAE 20W40 YAMALUBE 4 (10W30) or SAE 10W30 SAE 5W30 -20˚ -10˚ 0˚ 20˚ 30˚ 40˚ 50˚C 10˚ Recommended engine oil classification: API Service SE, SF, SG type or higher CAUTION: Be sure to use motor oils that do not contain anti- friction modifiers.
  • Page 167
    MODEL YFM660R Radiator capacity (including all routes): 1.3 L (1.14 lmp qt, 1.37 US qt) Air filter: Wet type element Fuel: Type UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY Tank capacity 12 L (2.64 Imp gal, 3.17 US gal) Reserve amount 2.6 L (0.57 Imp gal, 0.69 US gal) Carburetor: Type ×…
  • Page 168
    MODEL YFM660R Gear ratio: 31/12 (2.583) 30/18 (1.667) 27/21 (1.286) 22/21 (1.047) 19/21 (0.904) 33/25 × 25/18 (1.833) Reverse Chassis: Frame type Steel tube ° Caster angle Trail 47 mm (1.85 in) Tire: Type Tubeless AT21 × 7 — 10 Size: Front AT20 ×…
  • Page 169
    MODEL YFM660R Wheel travel: Front 230 mm (9.06 in) Rear 220 mm (8.66 in) Electrical: Ignition system DC-C.D.I. Generator system A.C. magneto Battery type/voltage capacity YTX14-BS/12V, 12Ah Headlight type: Krypton bulb Bulb voltage, wattage × quantity: 12V, 30W/30W × 2 Headlight 12V, 5W/21W ×…
  • Page 170: Noise Regulation

    EBU00430 NOISE REGULATION TAMPERING WITH NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM PROHIBITED: Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof: (1) The removal or rendering inop- erative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or replacement of any de- vice or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use or (2) the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.

  • Page 171: Maintenance Record

    EBU00431 MAINTENANCE RECORD Copies of work orders and/or receipts for parts you purchase and install will be required to docu- ment maintenance done in accordance with the warranty. The chart below is printed only as a re- minder to you that the maintenance work is required. It is not acceptable proof of maintenance work.

  • Page 172: Atv Limited Warranty

    EBU00432 YAMAHA MOTOR CORPORATION, U.S.A. ATV LIMITED WARRANTY 13-1…

  • Page 173
    13-2…
  • Page 174: Yamaha Extended Service (Y.e.s.)

    EBU00435 YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.) 14-1…

  • Page 175
    14-2…
  • Page 176
    EBU00436 WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death. 14-3…
  • Page 177
    EBU00437 14-5…
  • Page 178
    LOCATE AND READ OWNER’S MANUAL. FOLLOW ALL INSTRUCTIONS AND WARNINGS. (For replacement manual, call 1-800-532-1558) YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD. PRINTED ON RECYCLED PAPER PRINTED IN JAPAN 2001 . 7 — 6.0 × 1 CR…

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 328 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

YFM660RN

YFM660RNC

SERVICE MANUAL

LIT-11616-14-21 5LP-28197-E0

EB001000 NOTICE

This manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Company primarily for use by Yamaha dealers

and their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one

manual, so it is assumed that anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on

Yamaha machine has a basic understanding of the mechanical ideas and the procedures of

machine repair. Repairs attempted by anyone without this knowledge are likely to render the

machine unsafe and unfit for use.

Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all its models. Modifications and sig-

nificant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealers

and will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable.

NOTE:

Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following notations.

The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR

SAFETY IS INVOLVED!

Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death

to the machine operator, a bystander or a person inspecting or repairing the

machine.

A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid dam-

age to the machine.

A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.

WARNING

CAUTION:

NOTE:

EB002000 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MANUAL ORGANIZATION

This manual consists of chapters for the main categories of subjects. (See “Illustrated symbols”)

1st title 1: This is the title of the chapter with its symbol in the upper right corner of each page.

2nd title 2: This title indicates the section of the chapter and only appears on the first page of each

section. It is located in the upper left corner of the page.

3rd title 3: This title indicates a sub-section that is followed by step-by-step procedures accompa-

nied by corresponding illustrations.

EXPLODED DIAGRAMS

To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of each

removal and disassembly section.

1. An easy-to-see exploded diagram 4 is provided for removal and disassembly jobs.

2. Numbers 5 are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A number that is enclosed

by a circle indicates a disassembly step.

3. An explanation of jobs and notes is presented in an easy-to-read way by the use of symbol marks

6. The meanings of the symbol marks are given on the next page.

4. A job instruction chart 7 accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names

of parts, notes in jobs, etc.

5. For jobs requiring more information, the step-by-step format supplements 8 are given in addition

to the exploded diagram and the job instruction chart.

EB003000

ILLUSTRATED SYMBOLS

Illustrated symbols 1 to 9 are printed on the

top right of each page and indicate the subject

of each chapter.

1General information

2Specifications

3Periodic checks and adjustments

4Chassis

5Engine

6Cooling system

7Carburetion

8Electrical

9Troubleshooting

Illustrated symbols 0 to G are used to identify

the specifications appearing in the text.

0Can be serviced with engine mounted

AFilling fluid

BLubricant

CSpecial tool

DTorque

EWear limit, clearance

FEngine speed

G, V, A

Illustrated symbols H to N in the exploded

diagrams indicate the types of lubricants and

lubrication points.

HApply engine oil

IApply gear oil

JApply molybdenum disulfide oil

KApply wheel bearing grease

LApply lightweight lithium soap base grease

MApply molybdenum disulfide grease

NApply silicon grease

Illustrated symbols O to P in the exploded

diagrams indicate where to apply a locking

agent O and when to install a new part P.

OApply the locking agent (LOCTITE)

PReplace

12

34

56

78

90

AB

CD

EFG

HIJ

K

OP

GEN

INFO SPEC

CHK

ADJ

CHAS

ENG

COOL

CARB

–+

ELEC

TRBL

SHTG

T

R

.

.

EGM

BLS MS

LMN

LT New

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL INFORMATION GEN

INFO 1

SPECIFICATIONS SPEC 2

PERIODIC CHECKS AND

ADJUSTMENTS CHK

ADJ 3

CHASSIS CHAS 4

ENGINE ENG 5

COOLING SYSTEM COOL 6

CARBURETION CARB 7

ELECTRICAL ELEC 8

TROUBLESHOOTING TRBL

SHTG 9

–+

CHAPTER 1.

GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION …………………………….………………………………..1-1

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ………………………………………….1-1

MODEL LABEL ……………..……………………………………………………………1-1

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ……………………………………………….…………….1-2

PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL PROCEDURES ………………………….1-2

REPLACEMENT PARTS ………………………………………………………..……1-2

GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS …………………………………………1-2

LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS ……………………………1-3

BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS ……………………………………………………….1-3

CIRCLIPS ……………………………..……………………………………………..……1-3

CHECKING OF CONNECTIONS …………………………………………………………1-4

SPECIAL TOOLS …………………………………………….………………………………..1-5

CHAPTER 2.

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ……………………………………………………….……2-1

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS …………………………………………………….2-4

ENGINE ………………………………..……………………………………………..……2-4

CHASSIS ……………………………………………………………………………..….2-14

ELECTRICAL ………………………………….……………………………………….2-18

HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE ………………….…………………….2-20

GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ……………………………………………2-20

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES …………………………….2-21

ENGINE ………………………………..……………………………………………..….2-21

COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS ………………………………………………………….2-22

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS ………………………………………………………………..….2-23

CABLE ROUTING …………………………………..……………………………………….2-27

GEN

INFO 1

SPEC 2

CHK

ADJ 3

CHAS 4

ENG 5

COOL 6

CARB 7

ELEC 8

TRBL

SHTG 9

–+

CHAPTER 3.

PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

INTRODUCTION …………………………………….………………………………………… 3-1

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS …………………….. 3-1

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK ……………………………………………………3-3

SEAT, FRONT PANEL, FOOTREST GUARDS

AND ENGINE SKID PLATE ………………………………………………………3-3

HEADLIGHTS AND FRONT FENDER …………………………….…………….3-4

REAR FENDER ……………………..…………………………………….…………….3-5

FUEL TANK ………………….……………………………………………………………3-6

ENGINE ……………………………………….…………………………………….…………….3-8

ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE ……………….………………………3-8

ADJUSTING THE TIMING CHAIN ………………………..…………………….3-11

ADJUSTING THE IDLING SPEED ………………………..…………………….3-11

ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY ………………….…. 3-12

ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMITER ……………………………………………. 3-14

ADJUSTING THE STARTER CABLE ………….………………………………3-15

CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG ………..……………………………………….3-16

CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING ……………………………………………3-17

MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE …………………………3-18

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL ……………………………………..…. 3-19

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ………….……………………………………….3-20

ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE …………………………………………….3-23

CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ………………………………………………….….3-24

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL ……………………………………………3-27

CHANGING THE COOLANT …………………………………………………..….3-27

CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ….. 3-31

CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER …………………..…………………….3-31

CHASSIS ………………….……………………………………………..…………………….3-33

ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE ……………..………………………………3-33

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE ………………..………………………………3-33

ADJUSTING THE PARKING BRAKE …………………………………………..3-34

CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL ………………………………………3-35

CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PAD ……….………………………………3-36

CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PAD ………………………………………….3-36

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ……………………….. 3-36

CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSE …………………………………………………3-37

BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM ………………………….3-38

ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL ………………………….…………………….3-39

ADJUSTING THE REVERSE CONTROL CABLE ……………………..…. 3-40

ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK …………………………………….3-40

CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM ……….………………………………3-42

ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN ………………………….………………………………3-42

ADJUSTING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ……………………….….3-44

ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER …………………………….3-45

CHECKING THE TIRE ………………………………………………………………3-47

CHECKING THE WHEEL …………………………..………………………………3-49

CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLE ………………………….….3-49

LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDAL ………………………………….3-50

ELECTRICAL ………………………………………………………………………………….3-51

CHECKING THE BATTERY …………………………………………..…………..3-51

CHECKING THE FUSE ……………………………………….…………………….3-56

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM ………………….…………………….3-58

REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB …………………………………………3-58

CHAPTER 4.

CHASSIS

FRONT WHEELS …………………………………………….………………………………..4-1

FRONT WHEELS ……………………………………………………………………….4-1

CHECKING THE WHEEL …………………………..………………………………..4-3

CHECKING THE WHEEL HUB …………………………………………………….4-3

CHECKING THE BRAKE DISC …………………………………………………….4-4

INSTALLING WHEEL HUB ………………………………….………………………4-5

INSTALLING THE WHEEL …………………………………………………………..4-5

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB ………………………………………….4-6

REAR WHEELS ….……………………………………………..………………………4-6

WHEEL AXLE AND HUB ………..……………………………………………..……4-7

REMOVING THE REAR AXLE ……………………………………….…………….4-9

CHECKING THE WHEEL …………………………..………………………………4-10

CHECKING THE WHEEL HUB …………………………………………………..4-10

CHECKING THE REAR AXLE …………..……………………………………….4-10

CHECKING THE HUB ……………………………………………………………….4-11

CHECKING THE BRAKE DISC …………………………………………………..4-11

INSTALLING THE NUTS (REAR AXLE) ………………………………………4-11

INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUB …………………………………………………4-12

INSTALLING THE WHEEL …………………………………………………………4-12

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES …………………………………….…………………….4-13

FRONT BRAKE PADS …………………………………………………………..….4-13

REAR BRAKE PADS …………………………………………..…………………….4-14

REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PAD ………………………………………4-15

REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PAD ………………………………………..4-17

FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER …………………………….…………..4-19

REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER …………………….…………………….4-21

CHECKING THE MASTER CYLINDER ……………………………………….4-24

ASSEMBLING THE FRONT

AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ………………………………..4-25

INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ………………4-25

INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ……………….. 4-27

FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS ……………………………………………………….4-29

REAR BRAKE CALIPER ……………………………………………….…………..4-31

DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPER ……..4-34

GEN

INFO 1

SPEC 2

CHK

ADJ 3

CHAS 4

ENG 5

COOL 6

CARB 7

ELEC 8

TRBL

SHTG 9

–+

CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPER ……………….4-34

ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER ……………………………. 4-35

ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER ………………….…………..4-36

INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER ………………….…………..4-37

INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER …………………….…………..4-38

STEERING SYSTEM ……………………………………………………………………….4-40

HANDLEBAR …………………………………..……………………………………….4-40

REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE SWITCH, PARK SWITCH

AND CLUTCH SWITCH ……………………………………………………..….4-42

REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR GRIP …………………………………………4-42

CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR ……………………………………..…………..4-42

INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR ………………………………………………..4-43

INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR GRIP ………………………………………..4-43

INSTALLING THE CLUTCH LEVER ……………………………………………4-43

INSTALLING THE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ………………………….4-44

STEERING STEM ………………………………………………………..…………..4-45

REMOVING THE BEARING RETAINER ……..………………………………4-47

CHECKING THE STEERING STEM ……………………………………………4-47

INSTALLING THE BEARING RETAINER …………………………………….4-47

INSTALLING THE LOCK WASHER …………….………………………………4-47

TIE-ROD AND STEERING KNUCKLE …………………………….…………..4-48

REMOVING THE STEERING KNUCKLE …….………………………………4-49

CHECKING THE TIE-ROD …………………………………..…………………….4-49

CHECKING THE STEERING KNUCKLE …………………………………….. 4-49

INSTALLING THE TIE-ROD ……………………………………………………….4-49

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS …………………………..4-50

REMOVING THE FRONT ARM .……………………………………………..….4-52

CHECKING THE FRONT ARM …………………………………………………..4-52

CHECKING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ……………….…………..4-52

CHECKING THE BALL JOINT …………..……………………………………….4-53

INSTALLING THE FRONT ARM …………………………………………………4-54

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM ………………………………….4-55

HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

AND GAS CYLINDER ……………………………………………….…………..4-57

DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

AND GAS CYLINDER ……………………………………………….…………..4-57

REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ……………………………..4-58

CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ………………………………4-58

CHECKING THE RELAY ARM AND CONNECTING ARM ……………..4-58

INSTALLING THE RELAY ARM AND CONNECTING ARM ……………4-59

INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER …………………………….4-59

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN …………………………………………………..….4-60

REMOVING THE SWINGARM ……………………………………….…………..4-62

CHECKING THE SWINGARM ……………………………………….…………..4-62

CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN …………………………………………………4-63

INSTALLING THE SWINGARM ………………………………………………….4-65

INSTALLING THE DRIVE SPROCKET ………………………………………..4-65

CHAPTER 5.

ENGINE

ENGINE REMOVAL …………………………………………………………………………..5-1

MUFFLER AND EXHAUST PIPES ……………..………………………………..5-1

LEFT FOOTREST ………………………………………………………..…………….5-2

LEADS, CABLES AND HOSES .……………………………………………..……5-3

ENGINE MOUNTING BOLTS ………………………………………………………5-5

INSTALLING THE ENGINE ………………………………………………………….5-7

CYLINDER HEAD COVER ……………………………….………………………………..5-8

REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVER …………………..…………..5-10

CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVER ……………………………….5-10

CHECKING THE TAPPET COVER ………………………………………….…. 5-11

INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVER ……….…………………….5-11

ROCKER ARMS ………………….………………………………………………………….5-12

REMOVING THE ROCKER ARM ……………………………………………….5-14

CHECKING THE ROCKER ARM ………………………………………………..5-14

INSTALLING THE ROCKER ARM ………………………………………………5-15

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD …………………………………………………5-16

REMOVING THE CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD …………………5-18

CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT ………………………………………..…………..5-19

CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET ……………………..…………..5-19

CHECKING THE DECOMPRESSION SYSTEM ……………………………5-19

CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN GUIDE …………………………………….5-20

CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER …………………………….5-20

CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD ……………………………………………5-20

INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD ………………..5-21

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ………………………………………………………5-24

REMOVING THE VALVE AND VALVE SPRING …….…………………….5-25

CHECKING THE VALVE AND VALVE SPRING ……………….…………..5-26

INSTALLING THE VALVE AND VALVE SPRING ……………..…………..5-30

CYLINDER AND PISTON …………………………………………………….…………..5-32

REMOVING THE PISTON ……………………………………………………..….5-33

CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON …………..…………………….5-33

CHECKING THE PISTON RING …………………………………………………5-35

CHECKING THE PISTON PIN INSPECTION ……………………………….5-36

INSTALLING THE PISTON ………………………………….…………………….5-36

INSTALLING THE CYLINDER ……………………………………….…………..5-37

AC MAGNETO ………………………………………………………………………………..5-38

REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR ……………………………………5-40

CHECKING THE COIL ………………………………………………………………5-40

CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH …………………………………………5-41

INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR ………………………………….5-42

GEN

INFO 1

SPEC 2

CHK

ADJ 3

CHAS 4

ENG 5

COOL 6

CARB 7

ELEC 8

TRBL

SHTG 9

–+

CLUTCH ……………………………..……………………………………………..…………..5-43

REMOVING THE CLUTCH ……..……………………………………………..….5-47

REMOVING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR

AND BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR ……………………………………………5-47

CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATE ……………………………………………5-48

CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATE …….……………………………………….5-48

CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRING ……………………………………………5-49

CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING …………………………………………5-49

CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS ……………….………………………………5-49

CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE …………………………………………5-49

CHECKING THE PULL LEVER SHAFT AND PULL ROD ….…………..5-50

CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE …………………………………………….5-50

CHECKING THE BALANCER DRIVE ……………………………..…………..5-50

INSTALLING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR

AND BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR ……………………………………………5-51

INSTALLING THE CLUTCH …………………………………………..…………..5-52

OIL PUMP ………………………………………………………………………….…………..5-54

CHECKING THE OIL PUMP …………………………………………………..….5-56

ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP……………………………………………………5-56

SHIFT SHAFT ………………………………………..……………………………………….5-57

CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT …………………………………………………5-59

CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER ….……………………………………….5-59

CHECKING THE SHIFT GUIDE AND SHIFT LEVER …………………….5-59

CHECKING THE SEGMENT ………………………………..…………………….5-59

INSTALLING THE SHIFT LEVER ……………………………………………….5-59

INSTALLING THE STOPPER LEVER ..……………………………………….5-60

INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT ……………………………………………….5-61

CRANKCASE ………………………………………………………………………………….5-62

TIMING CHAIN AND SPEED SENSOR ROTOR ……………………….….5-62

CRANKCASE ………………………………….……………………………………….5-64

CRANKCASE BEARING ………………………………………………………..….5-65

SEPARATING THE CRANKCASE……………….………………………………5-66

CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN AND GUIDE ……………………………..5-66

CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER ……………………………………………….5-66

CHECKING THE CRANKCASE ………………………………………………….5-67

CHECKING THE BEARINGS ……………………………………………………..5-67

ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE ………………………………………………5-67

CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER ………………………………………………….….5-69

REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ……………………………………………….5-70

CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT ………………………………………………..5-70

INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT ………………………………….…………..5-71

TRANSMISSION ……………………………………………..………………………………5-72

MAIN AXLE .…………………………………………….………………………………5-74

DRIVE AXLE ……………………………………………………………………………5-75

CHECKING THE SHIFT FORK …………………………………………………..5-77

CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ………………………………………………….5-77

CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION ……………………………………………..5-77

ASSEMBLING THE MAIN AXLE AND DRIVE AXLE ……………………..5-78

INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION ……………………………….…………..5-79

CHAPTER 6.

COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR ……………………………………………………………………………………….6-1

CHECKING THE RADIATOR ……………………………………………………….6-3

INSTALLING THE RADIATOR ……………………………………….…………….6-4

THERMOSTAT ………………………………………………..………………………………..6-5

CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT …………………………………………….……6-7

ASSEMBLING THE THERMOSTAT ……………………..………………………6-7

WATER PUMP ………………………………………………..………………………………..6-8

DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP ……………………………………….6-11

CHECKING THE WATER PUMP ………………………………………………..6-11

ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP …………………………………………….6-12

CHAPTER 7.

CARBURETION

CARBURETORS …………………………………….…………………………………………7-1

DISASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR ………………………….…………….7-5

CHECKING THE CARBURETOR ………………………………………………… 7-5

ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR ……………………..………………………7-7

ADJUSTING THE FUEL LEVEL …………………………………………………… 7-8

GEN

INFO 1

SPEC 2

CHK

ADJ 3

CHAS 4

ENG 5

COOL 6

CARB 7

ELEC 8

TRBL

SHTG 9

–+

CHAPTER 8.

ELECTRICAL

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ……………………………………………………………8-1

CHECKING THE SWITCH ………………………………..………………………………..8-2

CHECKING THE SWITCH …………………………………..………………………8-2

CHECKING A SWITCH SHOWN IN THE MANUAL ………………………..8-2

CHECKING THE SWITCH CONTINUITY ………………………………………8-3

IGNITION SYSTEM ………………………………………….………………………………..8-5

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………….……………………………………………..……8-5

TROUBLESHOOTING ………………………………………………………………..8-6

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ………………………………………………………8-11

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………….……………………………………………..….8-11

STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION ………………………………………….…. 8-12

TROUBLESHOOTING ………………………………………………………………8-13

STARTER MOTOR ……….……………………………………………..…………..8-16

CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR ………….………………………………8-17

ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR ………………………….…………..8-18

CHARGING SYSTEM ………………………………………………………….…………..8-19

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………….……………………………………………..….8-19

TROUBLESHOOTING ………………………………………………………………8-20

LIGHTING SYSTEM …………………………………………………………….…………..8-22

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………….……………………………………………..….8-22

TROUBLESHOOTING ………………………………………………………………8-23

CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM …………………………………………8-25

SIGNAL SYSTEM ………………………………………………………………………..….8-27

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………….……………………………………………..….8-27

TROUBLESHOOTING ………………………………………………………………8-28

CHECKING THE SIGNAL SYSTEM …..……………………………………….8-30

COOLING SYSTEM …………………………………………………..…………………….8-36

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………….……………………………………………..….8-36

TROUBLESHOOTING ….……………………………………………..…………..8-37

CHAPTER 9.

TROUBLESHOOTING

STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING ……………………………………………..9-1

FUEL SYSTEM …………………………………………………………………………..9-1

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ………………………………………………………….……9-1

COMPRESSION SYSTEM …………………………………………………………..9-2

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE ………………………………………………..9-2

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE ………………………………………….9-2

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE ………………………….9-2

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE …………………..9-2

FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING …………………………………………………..…………….9-3

HARD SHIFTING ………………………………………………..………………………9-3

SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE ………………………………………………..9-3

JUMP-OUT GEAR ………………….…………………………………….…………….9-3

CLUTCH SLIPPING/DRAGGING ………………………………..………………………9-3

CLUTCH SLIPPING ……………………………………………………..…………….9-3

CLUTCH DRAGGING …………………………………………………..…………….9-3

OVERHEATING …………………………………………………………………………..……9-4

OVERHEATING …………………………………………………………………………9-4

OVER COOLING …………………………………….…………………………………………9-4

COOLING SYSTEM ……………….……………………………………………..……9-4

FAULTY BRAKE …………………………………….………………………………………… 9-4

POOR BRAKING EFFECT …………………………………………………………..9-4

SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION …………………………………………………9-5

MALFUNCTION ……………………………….…………………………………………9-5

UNSTABLE HANDLING …………………………………………….………………………9-5

UNSTABLE HANDLING ………………………………………………………………9-5

LIGHTING SYSTEM …………………………………………………………….…………….9-5

HEADLIGHT DARK …………………………………………………………………….9-5

BULB BURNT OUT ………………..……………………………………………..……9-5

1 — 1

GEN

INFO

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION

GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number 1 is

stamped into the left side of the frame.

MODEL LABEL

The model label 1 is affixed to the air filter

case cover. This information will be needed to

order spare parts.

1 — 2

GEN

INFO

EB101000

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

PROCEDURES

1.Remove all dirt, mud, dust and foreign mate-

rial before removal and disassembly.

2.Use proper tools and cleaning equipment.

Refer to the “SPECIAL TOOLS” section.

3.When disassembling the machine, always

keep mated parts together. This includes

gears, cylinder, piston and other parts that

have been “mated” through normal wear.

Mated parts must always be reused or

replaced as an assembly.

4.During machine disassembly, clean all parts

and place them in trays in the order of disas-

sembly. This will speed up assembly and

allow for the correct installation of all parts.

5.Keep all parts away from any source of fire.

EB101010

REPLACEMENT PARTS

1.Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all

replacements. Use oil and grease recom-

mended by Yamaha for all lubrication jobs.

Other brands may be similar in function and

appearance, but inferior in quality.

EB101020

GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS

1.Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings when

overhauling the engine. All gasket surfaces,

oil seal lips and O-rings must be cleaned.

2.Properly oil all mating parts and bearings

during reassembly. Apply grease to the oil

seal lips.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

1 — 3

GEN

INFO

EB101030

LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER

PINS

1.Replace all lock washers/plates 1 and cotter

pins after removal. Bend lock tabs along the

bolt or nut flats after the bolt or nut has been

tightened to specification.

EB101040

BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS

1.Install bearings and oil seals so that the

manufacturer’s marks or numbers are visible.

When installing oil seals, apply a light coat-

ing of lightweight lithium base grease to the

seal lips. Oil bearings liberally when install-

ing, if appropriate.

1Oil seal

CAUTION:

Do not use compressed air to spin the

bearings dry. This will damage the bearing

surfaces.

1Bearing

EB101050

CIRCLIPS

1.Check all circlips carefully before reassem-

bly. Always replace piston pin clips after one

use. Replace distorted circlips. When install-

ing a circlip 1, make sure that the sharp-

edged corner 2 is positioned opposite the

thrust 3 it receives. See sectional view.

4Shaft

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

1 — 4

GEN

INFO

CHECKING OF CONNECTIONS

EB801000

CHECKING OF CONNECTIONS

Check the connectors for stains, rust, mois-

ture, etc.

1.Disconnect:

Connector

2.Check:

Connector

Moisture Dry each terminal with an air

blower.

Stains/rust Connect and disconnect the

terminals several times.

3.Check:

Connector leads

Looseness Bend up the pin 1 and con-

nect the terminals.

4.Connect:

Connector terminals

NOTE:

The two terminals “click” together.

5.Check:

Continuity (using a pocket tester)

NOTE:

If there is no continuity, clean the terminals.

When checking the wire harness be sure to

perform steps 1 to 3.

As a quick remedy, use a contact revitalizer

available at most part stores.

Check the connector with a pocket tester as

shown.

1 — 5

GEN

INFO

SPECIAL TOOLS

EB102001

SPECIAL TOOLS

The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use

only the appropriate special tools; this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropriate

tools or improvised techniques. Special tools may differ by shape and part number from country to

country. In such a case, two types are provided.

When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes.

For US and CDN

P/N. YM-, YU-, YS-, YK-, ACC-

Except for US and CDN

P/N. 90890-

Tool No. Tool name/How to use Illustration

Bolt

90890-01083

Weight

90890-01084

Set

YU-01083-A

Slide hammer bolt (M6)/weight/set

These tools are used to remove the rocker

arm shaft.

90890-01135

YU-01135-A

Crankcase separating tool

This tool is used to separate the crank-

case.

Pot

90890-01274

Bolt

90890-01275

Crankshaft installer pot

Crankshaft installer bolt

These tools are used to install the crank-

shaft.

YU-90050

Crankshaft installer set

These tools are used to install the crank-

shaft.

Adapter

90890-04059

YM-90069

Spacer

90890-04081

YM-91044

Adapter

Spacer (crankshaft installer)

These tools are used to install the crank-

shaft.

90890-01016

Spacer

This tool is used to install the crankshaft.

1 — 6

GEN

INFO

SPECIAL TOOLS

90890-01304

YU-01304

Piston pin puller

This tool is used to remove the piston pin.

90890-01311

YM-08035

Tappet adjusting tool (3 mm)

This tool is necessary for adjusting the

valve clearance.

90890-01312

YM-01312-A

Fuel level gauge

This gauge is used to measure the fuel

level in the float chamber.

90890-01325

YU-24460-01

Radiator cap tester

This tool is used to check the cooling sys-

tem.

90890-01352

YU-33984

Adapter

This tool is used to check the cooling sys-

tem.

90890-01327

YM-01327

Damper rod holder (30 mm)

This tool is needed to loosen and tighten

the steering stem bearing retainer.

90890-01362

YU-33270

Flywheel puller

These tools are needed to remove the

rotor.

90890-01419

YM-37132

Axle nut wrench (50 mm)

This tool is needed to loosen or tighten the

rear axle nut.

Tool No. Tool name/How to use Illustration

1 — 7

GEN

INFO

SPECIAL TOOLS

90890-01469

YM-01469

Oil filter wrench

This tool is needed to loosen or tighten

the oil filter cartridge.

90890-01474

YM-01474

Ball joint remover/installer set

These tools are used to removing or

installing the ball joint.

90890-01480

YM-01480

Ball joint remover/installer attachment set

These tools are used to removing or

installing the ball joint.

90890-01701

YS-01880

Sheave holder

This tool is needed to hold the AC mag-

neto rotor when removing or installing the

AC magneto rotor bolts.

Set

90890-03081

YU-33223

Adapter

90890-04082

YU-33223-3

Compression gauge set

Adapter

These tools are needed to measure

engine compression.

90890-03112

YU-03112

Pocket tester

This instrument is needed for checking the

electrical system.

90890-03141

YM-33277-A

Timing light

This tool is necessary for checking ignition

timing.

Compressor

90890-04019

YM-04019

Attachment

90890-01243

Valve spring compressor

Valve spring compressor attachment

This tool is needed to remove and install

the valve assemblies.

Tool No. Tool name/How to use Illustration

1 — 8

GEN

INFO

SPECIAL TOOLS

Middle driven shaft

bearing driver

90890-04058

YM-04058-1

Mechanical seal

installer

90890-04078

YM-33221

Middle driven shaft bearing driver

Mechanical seal installer

These tools are used to install the water

pump seal.

90890-04064

YM-4064-A

Valve guide remover (ø 6)

This tool is needed to remove and install

the valve guide.

90890-04065

YM-04065-A

Valve guide installer (ø 6)

This tool is needed to install the valve

guide.

90890-04066

YM-04066

Valve guide reamer (ø 6)

This tool is needed to rebore the new

valve guide.

90890-04086

YM-91042

Clutch holding tool

This tool is needed to hold the clutch car-

rier when removing or installing the carrier

nut.

90890-06754

Ignition checker

This instrument is necessary for checking

the ignition system components.

YM-34487

Dynamic spark tester

This instrument is necessary for checking

the ignition system components.

Bond

90890-85505

Sealant

ACC-11001-05-01

Yamaha bond No. 1215

Sealant (Quick Gasket®)

This sealant (bond) is used on crankcase

mating surfaces, etc.

Tool No. Tool name/How to use Illustration

2 — 1

SPEC

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item Standard

Model code: 5LP1 : (Except for California)

5LP3 : (For California)

Dimensions:

Overall length 1,830 mm (72.0 in)

Overall width 1,100 mm (43.3 in)

Overall height 1,150 mm (45.3 in)

Seat height 860 mm (33.9 in)

Wheelbase 1,245 mm (49.0 in)

Minimum ground clearance 265 mm (10.4 in)

Minimum turning radius 3,300 mm (129.9 in)

Basic weight:

With oil and full fuel tank 193 kg (426 lb)

Engine:

Engine type Liquid-cooled 4-stroke, SOHC

Cylinder arrangement Forward-inclined single cylinder

Displacement 660 cm3

Bore × stroke 100.0 × 84.0 mm (3.94 × 3.31 in)

Compression ratio 9.2 : 1

Standard compression pressure (at sea level) 1,250 kPa (12.5 kg/cm2, 181 psi)

Starting system Electric starter

Lubrication system: Dry sump

Oil type or grade:

Engine oil

API service SE, SF, SG type or higher

Oil capacity:

Engine oil

Periodic oil change 1.9 L (1.67 lmp qt, 2.01 US qt)

With oil filter replacement 1.95 L (1.72 lmp qt, 2.06 US qt)

Total amount 2.3 L (2.02 lmp qt, 2.43 US qt)

Radiator capacity (including all routes) 1.3 L (1.14 lmp qt, 1.37 US qt)

Air filter: Wet type element

Fuel:

Type Unleaded fuel

Fuel tank capacity 12 L (2.64 lmp gal, 3.17 US gal)

Fuel reserve amount 2.6 L (0.57 lmp gal, 0.69 US gal)

0

°

10

°

30

°

50

°

70

°

90

°

110

°

YAMALUBE 4 (10W30) or SAE 10W30

-20

°

-10

°

0

°

10

°

20

°

30

°

40

°

YAMALUBE 4 (20W40) or SAE 20W40

SAE 5W30

130°F

50

°C

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 2

SPEC

Carburetor:

Type/quantity BSR33/2

Manufacturer MIKUNI

Spark plug:

Type/manufacturer DPR8EA-9/NGK

Spark plug gap 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.031 ~ 0.035 in)

Clutch type: Wet, multiple disc

Transmission:

Primary reduction system Spur gear

Primary reduction ratio 71/34 (2.088)

Secondary reduction system Chain drive

Secondary reduction ratio 40/13 (3.076)

Transmission type Constant mesh, 5-speed/forward.

1-speed/reverse

Operation Left foot operation

Gear ratio

1st gear 34/14 (2.428)

2nd gear 29/19 (1.526)

3rd gear 26/21 (1.238)

4th gear 22/21 (1.047)

5th gear 19/21 (0.904)

Reverse gear 28/23 × 23 × 16 (1.750)

Chassis:

Frame type Steel tube frame

Caster angle

Camber angle –1°

Kingpin angle 14.5°

Kingpin offset 5 mm (0.20 in)

Trail 47 mm (1.85 in)

Tread (STD) front 925 mm (36.42 in)

rear 840 mm (33.07 in)

Toe-in 0 ~ 10 mm (0 ~ 0.39 in)

Tire:

Type Tubeless

Size front AT21 × 7–10

rear AT20 × 10–9

Manufacturer front DUNLOP

rear DUNLOP

Type front KT331 Radial

rear KT335 Radial

Item Standard

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 3

SPEC

Tire pressure (cold tire):

Maximum load* 100 kg (220 lb)

Off-road riding front 27.5 kPa (0.275 kg/cm2, 4.0 psi)

rear 27.5 kPa (0.275 kg/cm2, 4.0 psi)

*Load in total weight of cargo, rider and acces-

sories

Brake:

Front brake type Dual disc brake

operation Right hand operation

Rear brake type Single disc brake

operation Right foot operation

Suspension:

Front suspension Double wishbone

Rear suspension Swingarm (link suspension)

Shock absorber:

Front shock absorber Coil spring/oil damper

Rear shock absorber Coil spring/gas-oil damper

Wheel travel:

Front wheel travel 230 mm (9.06 in)

Rear wheel travel 220 mm (8.66 in)

Electrical:

Ignition system DC-C.D.I.

Generator system A.C. magneto

Battery type YTX14-BS

Battery capacity 12 V 12 Ah

Headlight type: Krypton bulb

Bulb voltage/wattage × quantity:

Headlight 12 V 30 W/30 W × 2

Tail/brake light 12 V 5 W/21 W × 1

Indicator and warning lights

Neutral 12 V 1.7 W × 1

Reverse 12 V 1.7 W × 1

Coolant temperature 12 V 1.7 W × 1

Item Standard

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 4

SPEC

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Item Standard Limit

Cylinder head:

Warp limit —- 0.05 mm

(0.002 in)

Cylinder:

Bore size 100.005 ~ 100.045 mm

(3.9372 ~ 3.9388 in) 100.1 mm

(3.94 in)

Measuring point *50 mm (2.0 in) —-

Camshaft:

Drive method Chain drive (Left) —-

Camshaft cap inside diameter 23.000 ~ 23.021 mm

(0.9055 ~ 0.9063 in) —-

Camshaft journal diameter 22.967 ~ 22.980 mm

(0.9042 ~ 0.9047 in) —-

Camshaft journal-to-camshaft cap clearance 0.020 ~ 0.054 mm

(0.0008 ~ 0.0021 in) —-

Cam dimensions

Intake “A” 35.69 ~ 35.79 mm

(1.4051 ~ 1.4091 in) 35.59 mm

(1.4012 in)

“B” 30.15 ~ 30.25 mm

(1.1870 ~ 1.1909 in) 30.05 mm

(1.1831 in)

“C” 5.74 mm (0.2260 in) —-

Exhaust “A” 36.50 ~ 36.60 mm

(1.437 ~ 1.441 in) 36.40 mm

(1.4331 in)

“B” 30.15 ~ 30.25 mm

(1.187 ~ 1.191 in) 30.05 mm

(1.1831 in)

“C” 6.55 mm (0.2579 in) —-

C

A

B

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 5

SPEC

Camshaft runout limit —- 0.03 mm

(0.0012 in)

Timing chain:

Timing chain type/No. of links 75-RH2015/126 —-

Timing chain adjustment method Automatic —-

Rocker arm/rocker arm shaft:

Shaft outside diameter 11.976 ~ 11.991 mm

(0.4715 ~ 0.4721 in) —-

Arm-to-shaft clearance 0.009 ~ 0.042 mm

(0.0004 ~ 0.0017 in) —-

Valve, valve seat, valve guide:

Valve clearance (cold) IN 0.10 ~ 0.15 mm

(0.0039 ~ 0.0059 in) —-

EX 0.15 ~ 0.20 mm

(0.0059 ~ 0.0079 in) —-

Valve dimensions

“A” head diameter IN 29.9 ~ 30.1 mm

(1.1772 ~ 1.1850 in) —-

EX 31.9 ~ 32.1 mm

(1.2559 ~ 1.2638 in) —-

“B” face width IN 2.25 mm (0.0886 in) —-

EX 2.26 mm (0.0890 in) —-

“C” seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 1.6 mm

(0.0630 in)

EX 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 1.6 mm

(0.0630 in)

“D” margin thickness IN 0.85 ~ 1.15 mm

(0.0335 ~ 0.0453 in) —-

EX 0.85 ~ 1.15 mm

(0.0335 ~ 0.0453 in) —-

Stem outside diameter IN 5.975 ~ 5.990 mm

(0.2352 ~ 0.2358 in) 5.945 mm

(0.2341 in)

EX 5.960 ~ 5.975 mm

(0.2346 ~ 0.2352 in) 5.930 mm

(0.2335 in)

Guide inside diameter IN 6.000 ~ 6.012 mm

(0.2362 ~ 0.2367 in) 6.040 mm

(0.2378 in)

EX 6.000 ~ 6.012 mm

(0.2362 ~ 0.2367 in) 6.040 mm

(0.2378 in)

Item Standard Limit

Head Diameter

B

Face Width

C

Seat Width

D

Margin Thickness

A

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 6

SPEC

Stem-to-guide clearance IN 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm

(0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) 0.08 mm

(0.0031 in)

EX 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm

(0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) 0.10 mm

(0.0039 in)

Stem runout limit —- 0.01 mm

(0.0004 in)

Valve seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 1.6 mm

(0.0630 in)

EX 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 1.6 mm

(0.0630 in)

Valve spring:

Free length IN 35.95 mm (1.42 in) 34.15 mm

(1.34 in)

EX 37.75 mm (1.49 in) 35.86 mm

(1.41 in)

Set length (valve closed) IN 27.2 mm (1.07 in) —-

EX 30.7 mm (1.21 in) —-

Compressed pressure

(installed) IN 149 ~ 173 N (15.19 ~ 17.64 kg,

33.50 ~ 38.89 lb) —-

EX 165 ~ 191 N (16.83 ~ 19.49 kg,

37.09 ~ 42.94 lb) —-

Tilt limit IN 2.5°/1.6 mm

(2.5°/0.06 in)

EX 2.5°/1.6 mm

(2.5°/0.06 in)

Direction of winding

(top view) IN Clockwise —-

EX Clockwise —-

Item Standard Limit

*

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 7

SPEC

Piston:

Piston to cylinder clearance 0.05 ~ 0.07 mm

(0.0020 ~ 0.0028 in) 0.15 mm

(0.0059 in)

Piston size “D” 99.945 ~ 99.995 mm

(3.9348 ~ 3.9368 in) —-

Measuring point “H” 2.5 mm (0.10 in) —-

Piston off-set 1.0 mm (0.04 in) —-

Piston pin bore inside diameter 22.004 ~ 22.015 mm

(0.8663 ~ 0.8667 in) 22.045 mm

(0.8679 in)

Piston pin outside diameter 21.991 ~ 22.000 mm

(0.8658 ~ 0.8661 in) 21.971 mm

(0.8650 in)

Piston rings:

Top ring

Type Barrel —-

Dimensions (B × T) 1.2 × 3.8 mm

(0.0472 × 0.1496 in) —-

End gap (installed) 0.30 ~ 0.45 mm

(0.0118 ~ 0.0177 in) 0.70 mm

(0.0276 in)

Side clearance (installed) 0.04 ~ 0.08 mm

(0.0016 ~ 0.0031 in) 0.13 mm

(0.0051 in)

2nd ring

Type Taper —-

Dimensions (B × T) 1.2 × 4.0 mm

(0.0472 × 0.1575 in) —-

End gap (installed) 0.30 ~ 0.45 mm

(0.0118 ~ 0.0177 in) 0.80 mm

(0.0315 in)

Side clearance 0.03 ~ 0.07 mm

(0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) 0.13 mm

(0.0051 in)

Oil ring

Dimensions (B × T) 2.5 × 3.4 mm

(0.0984 × 0.1339 in) —-

End gap (installed) 0.2 ~ 0.7 mm

(0.0079 ~ 0.0276 in) —-

Item Standard Limit

H

D

T

B

B

T

B

T

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 8

SPEC

Crankshaft:

Crank width “A” 74.95 ~ 75.00 mm

(2.9508 ~ 2.9528 in) —-

Runout limit C1 —- 0.03 mm

(0.0012 in)

C2 —- 0.03 mm

(0.0012 in)

Big end side clearance “D” 0.32 ~ 0.64 mm

(0.0126 ~ 0.0252 in) 1.0 mm

(0.0394 in)

Big end radial clearance “E” 0.010 ~ 0.025 mm

(0.0004 ~ 0.0010 in) —-

Small end free play “F” 0.8 mm (0.0315 in) —-

Balancer:

Balancer drive method Gear —-

Clutch:

Friction plate 1

Thickness 2.74 ~ 2.86 mm

(0.108 ~ 0.113 in) 2.6 mm

(0.102 in)

Quantity 6 —-

Friction plate 2

Thickness 2.94 ~ 3.06 mm

(0.116 ~ 0.120 in) 2.8 mm

(0.110 in)

Quantity 2 —-

Clutch plate

Thickness 1.1 ~ 1.3 mm

(0.043 ~ 0.051 in) —-

Quantity 7 —-

Max. warpage —- 0.2 mm

(0.008 in)

Clutch spring

Free length 42.8 mm (1.69 in) 40.7 mm

(1.60 in)

Quantity 5 —-

Min. length —- 40.8 mm

(1.61 in)

Clutch release method Outer pull, rack and pinion pull —-

Item Standard Limit

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 9

SPEC

Transmission:

Main axle deflection limit —- 0.08 mm

(0.0031 in)

Drive axle deflection limit —- 0.08 mm

(0.0031 in)

Shifter:

Shifter type Shift drum and guide bar —-

Decompression device:

Device type Auto decomp —-

Air filter oil grade: Engine oil —-

Carburetors:

I. D. mark 5LP1 00 —-

Main jet (M.J) Carburetor #1 : #140

Carburetor #2 : #145 —-

Main air jet (M.A.J) #130 —-

Jet needle (J.N) 5ND16-56-3 —-

Needle jet (N.J) P-6M (#826) —-

Pilot air jet (P.A.J.1) Carburetor #1 : #80

Carburetor #2 : #150 —-

Pilot air jet (P.A.J.2) 1.3 —-

Pilot outlet (P.O) Carburetor #1 : 1.0

Carburetor #2 : 0.9 —-

Pilot jet (P.J) #22.5 —-

Bypass 1 (B.P.1) 0.8 —-

Bypass 2 (B.P.2) 0.8 —-

Valve seat size (V.S) 2.0 —-

Starter jet (G.S.1) #95 —-

Starter jet (G.S.2) 0.5

Throttle valve size (Th.V) #80 —-

Float height (F.H) 13 mm (0.51 in) —-

Fuel level (F.L) 3 ~ 4 mm (0.12 ~ 0.16 in) —-

Engine idle speed 1,450 ~ 1,550 r/min —-

Intake vacuum 32.0 ~ 33.3 kPa (240 ~ 250 mmHg,

9.45 ~ 9.83 inHg) —-

Oil pump:

Oil filter type Paper —-

Oil pump type Trochoid —-

Tip clearance “A” or “B” 0.12 mm (0.005 in) 0.2 mm

(0.008 in)

Side clearance 0.03 ~ 0.08 mm

(0.001 ~ 0.003 in) —-

Bypass valve setting pressure 80 ~ 120 kPa (0.8 ~ 1.2 kg/cm2,

11.6 ~ 17.4 psi) —-

Oil pressure (hot) 65 kPa (0.65 kg/cm2, 9.4 psi) at

1,500 r/min —-

Pressure check location Cylinder head —-

Item Standard Limit

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 10

SPEC

Cooling system:

Radiator core

Width 219 mm (8.62 in) —-

Height 300 mm (11.8 in) —-

Depth 16 mm (0.63 in) —-

Radiator cap opening pressure 95 ~ 125 kPa (0.95 ~ 1.25 kg/cm2,

13.8 ~ 18.1 psi) —-

Radiator capacity 0.55 L (0.48 Imp qt, 0.58 US qt) —-

Coolant reservoir

Capacity 0.29 L (0.26 Imp qt, 0.31 US qt) —-

From low to full level 0.165 L (0.15 Imp qt, 0.17 US qt) —-

Water pump:

Type Single suction centrifugal pump —-

Reduction ratio 33/34 (0.971)

Lubrication chart:

Item Standard Limit

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 11

SPEC

Cylinder head tightening sequence:

Item Standard Limit

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 12

SPEC

Tightening torques

Part to be tightened Part

name Thread

size Q’ty Tightening torque Remarks

Nm m·kg ft·lb

Cylinder head (exhaust pipe) Stud bolt M6 4 7 0.7 5.1

Cylinder head Bolt M9 4 38 3.8 27

Bolt M9 2 38 3.8 27

Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2

Spark plug M12 1 18 1.8 13

Cylinder head cover Bolt M6 17 10 1.0 7.2

Camshaft end cap Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2

Oil check bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1

Tappet cover (exhaust) M32 2 12 1.2 8.7

Tappet cover (intake) Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2

Cylinder Bolt M10 2 42 4.2 30

Bolt M10 2 42 4.2 30

Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2

Timing chain tensioner Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2

Timing chain tensioner cap Bolt M16 1 22 2.2 16

Timing chain guide (intake) Bolt M6 2 8 0.8 5.8

Camshaft sprocket Bolt M7 2 20 2.0 14

Rocker arm shaft Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2

Valve adjusting screw Nut M6 5 14 1.4 10

Radiator Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1

Coolant drain bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2

Engine oil drain bolt (oil tank) M10 1 25 2.5 18

Engine oil drain bolt (engine) M14 1 30 3.0 22

Oil filter bolt Union bolt M20 1 63 6.3 45 E

Oil filter cartridge M20 1 17 1.7 12

Oil delivery pipe 1 Union bolt M10 2 20 2.0 14

Oil delivery pipe 2 Union bolt M8 2 18 1.8 13

Oil pipe joint M14 1 50 5.0 36

Oil pipe 1 and oil pipe joint Nut M16 1 35 3.5 25

Oil pipe 2 and oil tank Nut M16 1 35 3.5 25

Air filter case Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1

Carburetor clamp Bolt M4 4 5 0.5 3.6

Exhaust pipe 1 and exhaust pipe 2 Bolt M8 1 16 1.6 12

Exhaust pipe protector Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2 LT

Spark arrester Bolt M6 1 8 0.8 5.8

Muffler and exhaust pipe 2 Bolt M8 1 20 2.0 14

Muffler Bolt M8 2 26 2.6 19

Silencer cap Bolt M6 3 10 1.0 7.2 LT

Exhaust pipe Nut M6 4 10 1.0 7.2

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 13

SPEC

Bearing retainer Screw M6 4 7 0.7 5.1 LT

AC magneto rotor Nut M14 1 150 15.0 110

Starter clutch Bolt M6 6 16 1.6 11 LT

Balancer driven gear Nut M18 1 140 14.0 100 M

Use a lock

washer.

Primary drive gear Nut M20 1 150 15.0 110 M

Use a lock

washer.

Clutch spring Bolt M6 5 8 0.8 5.8

Clutch boss Nut M20 1 90 9.0 65 Use a lock

washer.

Pull lever shaft Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1

Drive sprocket Nut M18 1 70 7.0 50 Use a lock

washer.

Oil seal retainer Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2

Shift drum segment Bolt M8 1 30 3.0 22

Shift guide Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2 LT

Stopper lever Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2

Reverse shift lever Bolt M6 1 13 1.3 9.4

Shift arm Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2

Shift pedal adjusting rod Nut M6 1 8 0.8 5.8 Left-hand

threads

Nut M6 1 8 0.8 5.8

Stator assembly Bolt M5 3 7 0.7 5.1 LT

Pick up coil Bolt M5 2 7 0.7 5.1 LT

AC magneto lead holder Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2 LT

Ignition coil Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1

Starter motor Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2

Neutral switch M10 1 20 2.0 14

Reverse switch M10 1 20 2.0 14

Thermo switch 1 M18 1 28 2.8 20

Thermo switch 2 M18 1 28 2.8 20

Part to be tightened Part

name Thread

size Q’ty Tightening torque Remarks

Nm m·kg ft·lb

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 14

SPEC

CHASSIS

Item Standard Limit

Steering system:

Steering bearing type Ball and race bearing —-

Front suspension:

Shock absorber travel 110 mm (4.33 in) —-

Fork spring free length 316.5 mm (12.46 in) —-

Spring fitting length 293.5 mm (11.56 in) —-

Spring rate (K1) 19.6 N/mm

(2.00 kg/mm, 111.92 lb/in) —-

Spring rate (K2) 29.4 N/mm

(3.00 kg/mm, 167.87 lb/in) —-

Optional spring No —-

Rear suspension:

Shock absorber travel 100 mm (3.94 in) —-

Spring free length 273 mm (10.75 in) —-

Spring fitting length 253 mm (9.96 in) —-

Spring rate (K1) 55 N/mm

(5.61 kg/mm, 314.05 lb/in) —-

Stroke (K1) 0 ~ 100 mm (0 ~ 3.94 in) —-

Optional spring No —-

Swingarm:

Free play limit end —- 1 mm

(0.04 in)

side —- 1 mm

(0.04 in)

Front wheel:

Type Panel wheel —-

Rim size 10 × 5.5 AT —-

Rim material Aluminum —-

Rim runout limit radial —- 2 mm

(0.08 in)

lateral —- 2 mm

(0.08 in)

Rear wheel:

Type Panel wheel —-

Rim size 9 × 8.5 AT —-

Rim material Aluminum —-

Rim runout limit radial —- 2 mm

(0.08 in)

lateral —- 2 mm

(0.08 in)

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 15

SPEC

Front disc brake:

Type Dual —-

Disc outside diameter × thickness 161.0 × 3.5 mm (6.34 × 0.14 in) —-

Pad thickness inner 4.2 mm (0.17 in) 1 mm

(0.04 in)

Pad thickness outer 4.2 mm (0.17 in) 1 mm

(0.04 in)

Master cylinder inside diameter 12.7 mm (0.50 in) —-

Caliper cylinder inside diameter 32.03 mm (1.26 in) —-

Brake fluid type DOT 4 —-

Rear disc brake:

Type Single —-

Disc outside diameter × thickness 220.0 × 3.6 mm (8.66 × 0.14 in) —-

Pad thickness inner 4.5 mm (0.18 in) 1 mm

(0.04 in)

Pad thickness outer 4.5 mm (0.18 in) 1 mm

(0.04 in)

Master cylinder inside diameter 12.7 mm (0.50 in) —-

Caliper cylinder inside diameter 33.96 mm (1.34 in) —-

Brake fluid type DOT 4 —-

Brake lever and brake pedal:

Brake lever free play (at lever end) 0 mm (0 in) —-

Brake pedal position 4 mm (0.16 in)

(Below the top of footrest) —-

Throttle lever free play 3 ~ 5 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in) —-

Item Standard Limit

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 16

SPEC

Tightening torques

Part to be tightened Thread size Tightening torque Remarks

Nm m·kg ft·lb

Engine bracket (upper) and frame M8 33 3.3 24

Engine bracket (upper) and engine M10 40 4.0 29

Engine bracket (lower) and frame M10 56 5.6 40

Engine bracket (lower) and engine M10 56 5.6 40

Engine bracket (middle and lower) and engine M10 56 5.6 40

Swingarm pivot shaft, engine and frame M16 95 9.5 68

Rear shock absorber and frame M10 32 3.2 23

Relay arm and swingarm M10 32 3.2 23

Connecting arm and frame M10 32 3.2 23

Relay arm and rear shock absorber M10 32 3.2 23

Relay arm and connecting arm M10 32 3.2 23

Drive chain guide and swingarm M6 7 0.7 5.1

Hub, brake caliper bracket and swingarm M12 90 9.0 65

Drive chain adjusting bolt and locknut M8 16 1.6 11

Front shock absorber and frame M10 45 4.5 32

Front shock absorber and front arm (lower) M10 45 4.5 32

Front arm (upper) and frame M10 38 3.8 27

Front arm (lower) and frame M10 32 3.2 23

Brake hose holder and front arm (upper) M6 7 0.7 5.1

Steering stem, pitman arm and frame M14 110 11 80

Steering stem bushing and frame M8 23 2.3 17 Use a lock

washer.

Steering stem and handlebar holder M8 23 2.3 17

Tie-rod end and locknut M10 15 1.5 11

Steering knuckle and front wheel hub M14 70 7.0 50

Steering knuckle and front arm (upper and lower) M10 25 2.5 18

Steering knuckle and tie-rod ball joint M10 25 2.5 18

Pitman arm and tie-rod ball joint M10 25 2.5 18

Frame and bearing retainer M42 40 4.0 29

Fuel tank and fuel cock M6 4 0.4 2.9

Fuel tank and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1

Front wheel and front wheel hub M10 45 4.5 32

Steering knuckle and front brake caliper M8 28 2.8 20

Front brake disc and front wheel hub M8 28 2.8 20 LT

Rear axle and rear wheel hub M14 120 12 85

Rear brake caliper and brake caliper bracket M8 28 2.8 20

Rear wheel and rear wheel hub M10 45 4.5 32

Driven sprocket and sprocket bracket M8 24 2.4 17

Front brake pipe nut M10 19 1.9 13

Front brake master cylinder and handlebar M6 7 0.7 5.1

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 17

SPEC

HINWEIS:

NOTE:

Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®) to ring nuts threads.

1st: Tighten the inside ring nut 55 Nm (5.5 m • kg, 40 ft • lb).

2nd: Tighten the outside ring nut while holding the inside ring nut 190 Nm (19 m • kg, 140 ft • lb).

3rd: Loosen the inside ring nut while holding the outside ring nut 240 Nm (24 m • kg, 170 ft • lb).

Front brake master cylinder and brake lever M6 6 0.6 4.3

Front brake master cylinder and brake hose M10 27 2.7 19

Brake hose joint and frame M6 10 1.0 7.2

Bleed screw M8 6 0.6 4.3

Front brake pad holding bolt M10 18 1.8 13

Front brake caliper and brake hose M10 27 2.7 19

Front brake caliper retaining bolt M8 23 2.3 17

Rear axle ring nut M38 SEE NOTE

Rear brake pad holding bolt M10 18 1.8 13 Use a lock

washer.

Rear brake caliper and brake hose M10 30 3.0 22

Rear brake master cylinder and frame M8 20 2.0 14

Rear brake master cylinder and brake hose M10 30 3.0 22

Parking brake adjusting bolt and locknut M8 16 1.6 11

Rear brake disc and brake disc bracket M8 28 2.8 20

Rear brake fluid reservoir cover and bracket M6 4 0.4 2.9

Rear brake fluid reservoir and bracket M6 4 0.4 2.9

Brake hose holder and swingarm M6 7 0.7 5.1

Front bumper and frame M8 31 3.1 22

Front fender bracket and frame M8 16 1.6 11

Rear carrier bar and frame M8 23 2.3 17

Footrest and frame M10 65 6.5 48

Footrest guard bracket and frame M8 33 3.3 24

Footrest and footrest guard bracket M8 16 1.6 11

Footrest guard bracket and rear fender M6 7 0.7 5.1

Battery holding bracket and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1

Air filter case and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1

Carburetor clamp screw M4 5 0.5 3.6

Tail/brake light bracket and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1

Tail/brake light bracket and tail/brake light M6 7 0.7 5.1

Swingarm skid plate and swingarm M6 7 0.7 5.1

Swingarm skid plate and swingarm M8 16 1.6 11

Drive chain tensioner and frame M8 32 3.2 23

Engine skid plate and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1

Main frame and rear frame M10 53 5.3 38

Part to be tightened Thread size Tightening torque Remarks

Nm m·kg ft·lb

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 18

SPEC

ELECTRICAL

Item Standard Limit

Voltage: 12 V —-

Ignition system:

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) 12°/ 1,500 r/min —-

Advancer type Digital type —-

C.D.I.:

Magneto model/manufacturer F4T260/MITSUBISHI —-

Pickup coil resistance/color 445 ~ 545 at 20 °C (68 °F)/

White/Red – White/Green —-

Rotor rotation direction detection coil resis-

tance/color 0.069 ~ 0.085 at 20 °C (68 °F)/

Red – White/Blue —-

C.D.I. unit model/manufacturer F8T37971/MITSUBISHI —-

Ignition coil:

Model/manufacturer 2JN/YAMAHA —-

Minimum spark gap 6 mm (0.24 in) —-

Primary winding resistance 0.18 ~ 0.28 at 20 °C (68 °F) —-

Secondary winding resistance 6.32 ~ 9.48 k at 20 °C (68 °F) —-

Spark plug cap:

Type Resin type —-

Resistance 10 k—-

Charging system:

Type A.C. magneto generator —-

Model/manufacturer F4T260/MITSUBISHI —-

Nominal output 14 V 16 A at 5,000 r/min —-

Charging coil resistance/color 0.43 ~ 0.65 at 20 °C (68 °F)/

White – White —-

Rectifier:

Type Semi conductor-short circuit —-

Model/manufacturer SH640E-11/SHINDENGEN —-

No load voltage (DC) 14.1 ~ 14.9 V —-

Capacity 14 A —-

Withstand voltage 200 V —-

Electric starter system:

Type Constantmesh type —-

Starter motor

Model/manufacturer SM-13/MITSUBA —-

Output 0.8 kW —-

Armature coil resistance 0.025 ~ 0.035 at 20 °C (68 °F) —-

Brush overall length 12.5 mm (0.49 in) 5 mm

(0.20 in)

Spring force 7.65 ~ 10.01 N (27.54 ~ 36.03 oz) —-

Commutator diameter 28 mm (1.10 in) 27 mm

(1.06 in)

Mica undercut 0.7 mm (0.03 in) —-

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 19

SPEC

Starter relay

Model/manufacturer MS5F-721/JIDECO —-

Amperage rating 180 A —-

Coil winding resistance 4.18 ~ 4.62 at 20 °C (68 °F) —-

Thermostat switch:

Thermostat switch 1

Model/manufacturer 5GH/NIPPON THERMOSTAT —-

Thermostat switch 2

Model/manufacturer 5LP/NIPPON THERMOSTAT —-

Circuit breaker:

Type Fuse —-

Amperage for individual circuit

Fuse 20 A × 1 —-

Reserve 20 A × 1 —-

Item Standard Limit

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 20

SPEC

EB201000

HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION

TABLE

All specification data in this manual are listed

in SI and METRIC UNITS.

Use this table to convert METRIC unit data to

IMPERIAL unit data.

Ex.

CONVERSION TABLE

EB202001

GENERAL TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS

This chart specifies torque for standard fasten-

ers with standard I.S.O. pitch threads. Torque

specifications for special components or

assemblies are provided for each chapter of

this manual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-

fastener assemblies in a crisscross fashion, in

progressive stages, until the specified torque is

reached. Unless otherwise specified, torque

specifications require clean, dry threads. Com-

ponents should be at room temperature.

A: Distance between flats

B: Outside thread diameter

METRIC MULTIPLIER IMPERIAL

** mm × 0.03937 = ** in

2 mm × 0.03937 = 0.08 in

METRIC TO IMPERIAL

Metric unit Multiplier Imperial unit

Torque

m·kg

m·kg

cm·kg

cm·kg

7.233

86.794

0.0723

0.8679

ft·lb

in·lb

ft·lb

in·lb

Weight kg

g2.205

0.03527 lb

oz

Speed km/hr 0.6214 mph

Distance

km

m

m

cm

mm

0.6214

3.281

1.094

0.3937

0.03937

mi

ft

yd

in

in

Volume/

Capacity

cc (cm3)

cc (cm3)

lt (liter)

lt (liter)

0.03527

0.06102

0.8799

0.2199

oz (IMP liq.)

cu·in

qt (IMP liq.)

gal (IMP liq.)

Misc.

kg/mm

kg/cm2

Centigrade

(°C)

55.997

14.2234

9/5+32

lb/in

psi (lb/in2)

Fahrenheit (°F)

A

(nut) B

(bolt)

General torque

specifications

Nm m•kg ft•lb

10 mm 6 mm 6 0.6 4.3

12 mm 8 mm 15 1.5 11

14 mm 10 mm 30 3.0 22

17 mm 12 mm 55 5.5 40

19 mm 14 mm 85 8.5 61

22 mm 16 mm 130 13.0 94

HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE/

GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

2 — 21

SPEC

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

ENGINE

Lubrication points Lubricant type

Oil seal lips (all) LS

O-ring (all) LS

Bearings (all) E

Crank pin E

Connecting rod (bearing) E

Camshaft sprocket M

Crankshaft E

Piston surface/piston rings E

Piston pin E

Primary drive gear/primary driven gear E

Valve stem/valve stem end M

Rocker arm shaft E

Rocker arm M

Camshaft lobe/journal M

Oil pump shaft, rotor, housing E

Oil filter O-ring E

Starter idle gear/shaft E

Transmission gear (wheel/pinion) M

Axle (main/drive) M

Shift fork/guide bar E

Shift drum/shift shaft/shift cam stopper ball E

Shift lever/shift guide LS

Crankcase mating surfaces Sealant (Quick Gasket)

Yamaha bond No.1215

Cylinder head and cylinder head cover mating surfaces Sealant (Quick Gasket)

Yamaha bond No.1215

AC magneto lead grommet

(AC magneto cover) Sealant (Quick Gasket)

Yamaha bond No.1215

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

2 — 22

SPEC

COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS

1Radiator

2Radiator fan

3Radiator outlet hose

4Water pump inlet hose

5Water pump

6Water jacket outlet pipe

7Thermostat inlet hose

8Thermostat

9Radiator inlet hose

0Thermo switch 2

AThermo switch 1

COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS

2 — 23

SPEC

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

1Oil tank

2Oil pipe 2

3Oil pipe 1

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

2 — 24

SPEC

1Oil delivery pipe 2

2Oil delivery pipe 1

3Oil filter

4Crankshaft

5Oil pump

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

2 — 25

SPEC

1Oil pipe 2

2Drive axle

3Main axle

4Engine oil drain bolt (engine)

5Oil pipe 1

6Oil strainer

7Shift drum

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

2 — 26

SPEC

1Oil delivery pipe 2

2Oil filter cartridge

3Oil pump rotor 1

4Oil pump rotor 2

5Oil pipe 1

6Main axle

OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

2 — 27

SPEC

CABLE ROUTING

1Parking brake cable

2Starter cable

3Clutch cable

4Throttle cable

5Front brake hose

6Front brake switch

7Park switch

ÈFasten the handlebar switch lead, park switch

lead and clutch switch lead to the handlebar with

the plastic band.

ÉFasten the front brake switch lead to the handle-

bar with the plastic band.

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 28

SPEC

1Front brake hose

2Throttle cable

3Main switch lead

4Indicator light lead

5Clutch cable

6Parking brake cable

7Starter cable

8Coolant reservoir hose

9Wire harness

0Ignition coil lead

AHeadlight lead coupler (left)

BBrake pipe

CHeadlight lead coupler (right)

DRadiator fan breather hose

EHeadlight lead (right)

ÈPass the throttle cable through the cable guide.

ÉPass the clutch cable, parking brake cable and

starter cable through the cable guide.

ÊFasten the left and right headlight lead, radiator

fan lead and thermo switch 1 lead to the frame

with the plastic band.

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 29

SPEC

1Throttle cable

2Fuel tank breather hose

3Fuel hose

4Carburetor air vent hose

5Negative battery lead

6AC magneto lead

7Thermo switch 1

8Coolant reservoir hose

9Starter cable

ÈPut the wire harness and coolant reservoir hose

with the plastic holder.

ÉFasten the wire harness, AC magneto lead,

speed sensor lead, negative battery lead and

rear brake switch lead with the plastic band.

Ê70 mm (2.76 in)

Ë25 ~ 35 mm (0.98 ~ 1.38 in)

Ì60 mm (2.36 in)

Í0 ~ 5 mm (0 ~ 0.20 in)

Î80 ~ 90 mm (3.15 ~ 3.54 in)

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 30

SPEC

1Coolant reservoir hose

2Carburetor air vent hose

3Reservoir tank breather hose

4Rectifier/regulator

5CDI unit

6Negative battery lead

7AC magneto lead

8Wire harness

9Starter motor lead

0Tail/brake light lead

ARectifier/regulator lead

ÈPass the negative battery lead between the wire

harness and frame.

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 31

SPEC

1Radiator fan breather hose

2Reverse control cable

3Parking brake cable

4Clutch cable

ÈFasten the reverse control cable to the frame

with the plastic band.

É15 ~ 25 mm (0.59 ~ 0.98 in)

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 32

SPEC

1Rear brake hose

2Parking brake cable

3Negative battery lead

4AC magneto lead

5Crankcase breather hose

6Carburetor drain hose

7Rear brake switch

8Speed sensor

9Speed sensor lead

0Rear brake switch lead

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 33

SPEC

1Thermo switch 1 lead

2Headlight lead (right)

3Radiator fan breather hose

4Thermo switch 2 lead

5Carburetor breather hose

6Headlight lead (left)

7Wire harness

8Coolant reservoir hose

ÈFasten the fan motor lead, headlight lead (right)

and thermo switch 1 lead to the frame with the

plastic band.

CABLE ROUTING

2 — 34

SPEC

1Positive battery lead

2Tail/brake light lead

3Coolant reservoir breather hose

4Negative battery lead

5Coolant reservoir hose

6Starter motor lead

7Wire harness

8Rectifier/regulator lead

ÈFasten the wire harness with the plastic clamp.

ÉFasten the starter motor lead and starter relay

lead with the plastic clamp.

CABLE ROUTING

3 — 1

CHK

ADJ

INTRODUCTION/PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/

LUBRICATION INTERVALS

EB300000 PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

INTRODUCTION

This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended inspections and adjust-

ments. These preventive maintenance procedures, if followed, will ensure more reliable vehicle

operation and a longer service life. The need for costly overhaul work will be greatly reduced. This

information applies to vehicles already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared

for sale. All service technicians should be familiar with this entire chapter.

EB301000

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS

* It is recommended that these items be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.

** Lithium soap base grease

ITEM ROUTINE INITIAL EVERY

1

month 3

months 6

months 6

months 1

year

Valves*

(See page 3-8.) Check valve clearance.

Adjust if necessary.

Cooling system

(See page 3-27.)

Check coolant leakage.

Repair if necessary.

Replace coolant every 24 months.

Spark plug

(See page 3-16.)

Check condition.

Adjust gap and clean.

Replace if necessary.

Air filter

(See page 3-24.) Clean.

Replace if necessary.

Every 20~40 hours

(More often in wet or dusty areas.)

Carburetor*

(See page 3-11.) Check and adjust idle speed/starter operation.

Adjust if necessary.

Crankcase breather

system* Check breather hose for cracks or damage.

Replace if necessary.

Exhaust system* Check for leakage.

Retighten if necessary.

Replace gasket if necessary.

Spark arrester

(See page 3-31.) • Clean.

Fuel line* Check fuel hose for cracks or damage.

Replace if necessary.

Engine oil

(See page 3-19.) Replace (Warm engine before draining).

Engine oil filter Replace if necessary.

Drive chain

(See page 3-40.) Check and adjust slack/alignment/clean/lube.

Brake*

(See page 3-33.) Check operation/fluid leakage/See NOTE page 3-2.

Correct if necessary.

Clutch*

(See page 3-23.) Check operation.

Adjust if necessary.

Wheels*

(See page 4-3.) Check balance/damage/runout.

Replace if necessary.

Wheel bearings* Check bearing assembly for looseness/damage.

Replace if damaged.

Steering system*

(See page 3-42.)

Check operation.

Replace if damaged.

Check toe-in.

Adjust if necessary.

Upper and lower arm

pivot and steering

shaft* Lubricate every 6 months.**

Rear arm pivot* Lubricate every 6 months.**

Fittings and fasten-

ers* Check all chassis fittings and fasteners.

Correct if necessary.

3 — 2

CHK

ADJ

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS

NOTE:

Recommended brake fluid: DOT 4

Brake fluid replacement:

1.When disassembling the master cylinder or caliper cylinder, replace the brake fluid.

Normally check the brake fluid level and add fluid as required.

2.On the inner parts of the master cylinder and caliper cylinder, replace the oil seals every two

years.

3.Replace the brake hoses every four years, or if cracked or damaged.

WARNING

Indicates a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.

3 — 3

CHK

ADJ

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK

SEAT, FRONT PANEL, FOOTREST GUARDS AND ENGINE SKID PLATE

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the seat, front panel, foot-

rest guard and engine skid plate Remove the parts in the order below.

1Seat 1

NOTE:

Pull back the seat lock lever, than pull up

on the rear of the seat.

2 Front panel 1

3 Left footrest guard 1

4 Right footrest guard 1

5 Engine skid plate 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

3 — 4

CHK

ADJ

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK

HEADLIGHTS AND FRONT FENDER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the headlight and front

fender Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat and front panel Refer to “SEAT, FRONT PANEL, FOOT-

REST GUARDS AND ENGINE SKID

PLATE”.

1 Headlight coupler 2 Disconnect.

2 Left headlight 1

3 Right headlight 1

4 Fuel tank top panel 1

5 Front fender 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

3 — 5

CHK

ADJ

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK

REAR FENDER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the rear fender Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat Refer to “SEAT, FRONT PANEL, FOOT-

REST GUARDS AND ENGINE SKID

PLATE”.

Front fender Refer to “HEADLIGHTS AND FRONT

FENDER”.

1 Battery holding bracket 1

2 Battery lead 2 Disconnect.

CAUTION:

First disconnect the negative lead,

then disconnect the positive lead.

3 Battery 1

4 Rear fender 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

3 — 6

CHK

ADJ

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK

FUEL TANK

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the fuel tank Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat and front panel Refer to “SEAT, FRONT PANEL, FOOT-

REST GUARDS AND ENGINE SKID

PLATE”.

Front fender Refer to “HEADLIGHTS AND FRONT

FENDER”.

1 Fuel hose 1 NOTE:

Before disconnecting the fuel hose, turn

the fuel cock to “OFF”.

2 Fuel tank 1 NOTE:

When installing the fuel tank, pass the

fuel tank breather hose through the hole

in the handlebar protector.

3 Plastic band 2

3 — 7

CHK

ADJ

SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL TANK

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

4 Rubber cover 1 1

5 Rubber cover 2 1

6 Hose holder 2

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

3 — 8

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE

ENGINE

ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE

NOTE:

The valve clearance must be adjusted when

the engine is cool to the touch.

Adjust the valve clearance when the piston is

at the Top Dead Center (T.D.C.) on the com-

pression stroke.

1.Remove:

Seat

Front fender

Fuel tank

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Remove:

Tappet cover (intake) 1

Tappet covers (exhaust) 2

3.Disconnect:

Spark plug cap 3

4.Remove:

Spark plug

5.Remove:

Crankshaft end accessing screw 1

Timing mark accessing screw 2

3 — 9

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE

6.Check:

Valve clearance

Out of specification Adjust.

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise with a

wrench.

Align the “I” mark 1 on the rotor with the sta-

tionary pointer 2 on the crankcase cover.

When the “I” mark is aligned with the station-

ary pointer, the piston is at the Top Dead

Center (T.D.C.).

NOTE:

When the piston is at the Top Dead Center

(T.D.C.) on the compression stroke, there

should be clearance between the valve stem

tips and their respective rocker arm adjusting

screws.

If there is no clearance, rotate the crankshaft

counterclockwise one turn.

Valve clearance (cold):

Intake:

0.10 ~ 0.15 mm

(0.0039 ~ 0.0059 in)

Exhaust:

0.15 ~ 0.20 mm

(0.0059 ~ 0.0079 in)

Measure the valve clearance using a feeler

gauge 3.

***********************************************

3 — 10

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE

7.Adjust:

Valve clearance

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Loosen the locknut 1.

Insert a feeler gauge 2 between the adjuster

end and the valve end.

Turn the adjuster 3 clockwise or counter-

clockwise with the tappet adjusting tool 4

until the proper clearance is obtained.

Hold the adjuster to prevent it from moving

and then tighten the locknut.

Measure the valve clearance.

If the clearance is incorrect, repeat the above

steps until the proper clearance is obtained.

***********************************************

Tappet adjusting tool:

P/N. YM-08035, 90890-01311

T

R

.

.

Locknut:

14 Nm (1.4 m • kg, 10 ft • lb)

8.Install:

All removed parts

NOTE:

Install all removed parts in the reverse order of

their disassembly. Note the following points.

9.Install:

Spark plug

Tappet cover (intake)

Tappet covers (exhaust)

T

R

.

.

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • lb)

3 — 11

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE/ADJUSTING THE

TIMING CHAIN/ADJUSTING THE IDLING SPEED

10.Install:

Fuel tank

Front fender

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

ADJUSTING THE TIMING CHAIN

Adjustment free.

ADJUSTING THE IDLING SPEED

1.Start the engine and let it warm up for sev-

eral minutes.

2.Attach:

Tachometer

(to the spark plug lead)

3.Check:

Engine idling speed

Out of specification Adjust.

Engine idling speed:

1,450 ~ 1,550 r/min

3 — 12

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE IDLING SPEED/

ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY

4.Adjust:

Engine idling speed

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Turn the throttle stop screw 1 in or out until

the specified idling speed is obtained.

***********************************************

5.Detach:

Tachometer

6.Adjust:

Throttle lever free play

Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE

LEVER FREE PLAY”.

Turning in Idling speed becomes

higher.

Turning out Idling speed becomes

lower.

ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE

PLAY

NOTE:

Engine idling speed should be adjusted prop-

erly before adjusting the throttle lever free

play.

1.Check:

Throttle lever free play a

Out of specification Adjust.

Throttle lever free play:

3 ~ 5 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in)

3 — 13

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY

2.Adjust:

Throttle lever free play

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

First step:

Pull back the adjuster cover 1.

Loosen the locknut 2 on the carburetor side.

Turn the adjuster 3 in or out until the correct

free play is obtained.

Tighten the locknut 2.

Push in the adjuster cover 1.

NOTE:

If the free play cannot be adjusted here, adjust

it at the throttle lever side of the cable.

Second step:

Pull back the adjuster cover 4.

Loosen the locknut 5.

Turn the adjuster 6 in or out until the correct

free play is obtained.

Tighten the locknut 5.

Push in the adjuster cover 4.

WARNING

After adjusting the free play, turn the handle-

bar to the right and left to make sure that the

engine idling speed does not increase.

***********************************************

Turning in Free play is increased.

Turning out Free play is decreased.

Turning in Free play is increased.

Turning out Free play is decreased.

3 — 14

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMITER

ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMITER

The speed limiter keeps the carburetor throttle

from becoming fully-opened even when the

throttle lever is applied to the maximum posi-

tion. Screwing in the adjuster stops the engine

speed from increasing.

1.Check:

Speed limiter length a

Out of specification Adjust.

Speed limiter length:

12 mm (0.47 in)

2.Adjust:

Speed limiter length

***********************************************

Speed limiter length adjustment steps:

Loosen the locknut 1.

Turn the adjuster 2 in or out until the speci-

fied speed limiter length is obtained.

Tighten the locknut.

WARNING

Particularly for a beginner rider, the

speed limiter should be screwed in com-

pletely. Screw it out little by little as their

riding technique improves. Never remove

the speed limiter for a beginning rider.

For proper throttle lever operation do not

turn out the adjuster more than 12 mm

(0.47 in). Also, always adjust the throttle

lever free play to 3 ~ 5 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in).

***********************************************

Turning in Speed limiter length is

decreased.

Turning out Speed limiter length is

increased.

3 — 15

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE STARTER CABLE

ADJUSTING THE STARTER CABLE

1.Adjust:

Starter cable

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Disconnect the starter cable 1 from the car-

buretor body.

NOTE:

Do not remove the starter plunger 2 from the

starter cable.

Measure the starter plunger stroke distance

a of the starter lever 3 fully close-to-fully

open position.

If the distance is out of specification adjust it

as described below.

ÈFully closed position

ÉFully open position

Pull back the boot 4.

Loosen the locknut 5.

Turn the adjuster 6 in or out until the correct

distance is obtained.

Tighten the locknut 5.

Push in the boot 4.

Connect the starter cable.

WARNING

After adjusting the cable, turn the handle-

bar to right to left, and make sure that the

engine idling speed does not increase.

***********************************************

Starter plunger stroke distance a:

15 mm (0.59 in)

Turning in Distance increased.

Turning out Distance decreased.

3 — 16

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG

1.Remove:

Spark plug

2.Check:

Spark plug type

Incorrect Replace.

Standard spark plug:

DPR8EA-9/NGK

3.Check:

Electrode 1

Wear/damage Replace.

Insulator 2

Abnormal color Replace.

Normal color is a medium-to-light tan color.

4.Clean the spark plug with a spark plug

cleaner or wire brush.

5.Measure:

Plug gap a

Use a wire gauge or feeler gauge.

Out of specification Regap.

6.Tighten:

Spark plug

NOTE:

Before installing a spark plug, clean the gasket

surface and plug surface.

Spark plug gap:

0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.031 ~ 0.035 in)

T

R

.

.

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)

CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG

3 — 17

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING

CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING

NOTE:

Engine idling speed and throttle cable free play

should be adjusted properly before checking

the ignition timing.

1.Attach:

Tachometer

Timing light

(to spark plug lead)

Timing light:

P/N. YM-33277-A, 90890-03141

2.Check:

Ignition timing

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Warm up the engine and keep it at the speci-

fied speed.

Remove the timing mark accessing screw 1.

Visually check the stationary pointer 2 to

verify it is within the required firing range 3

indicated on the flywheel.

Incorrect firing range Check the pulser coil

assembly.

Install the timing mark accessing screw.

***********************************************

3.Detach:

Timing light

Tachometer

Engine speed:

1,450 ~ 1,550 r/min

3 — 18

CHK

ADJ

MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE

MEASURING THE COMPRESSION

PRESSURE

NOTE:

Insufficient compression pressure will result in

a loss of performance.

1.Check:

Valve clearance

Out of specification Adjust.

Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEAR-

ANCE”.

2.Start the engine and let it warm up for sev-

eral minutes.

3.Stop the engine.

4.Remove:

Spark plug

5.Attach:

Adapter

Compression gauge 1

Compression gauge:

P/N. YU-33223, 90890-03081

Adapter:

P/N. YU-33223-3, 90890-04082

6.Measure:

Compression pressure

Above the maximum pressure:

Inspect the cylinder head, valve surfaces,

and piston crown for carbon deposits.

Below the minimum pressure:

Squirt a few drops of oil into the affected cyl-

inder and measure again.

Refer to the table below.

Compression pressure

(with oil introduced into cylinder)

Reading Diagnosis

Higher than

without oil Worn or damaged piston,

rings or cylinder wall.

Same as

without oil Defective valves or

cylinder head gasket.

3 — 19

CHK

ADJ

MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE/

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

***********************************************

Measurement steps:

Crank over the engine with the electric

starter (be sure the battery is fully charged)

with the throttle fully-open until the compres-

sion reading on the gauge stabilizes.

WARNING

When cranking the engine, ground the

spark plug lead to prevent sparking.

***********************************************

7.Install:

Spark plug

Compression pressure (at sea level):

Standard:

1,250 kPa (12.5 kg/cm2, 181 psi)

Minimum:

1,050 kPa (10.5 kg/cm2, 149 psi)

Maximum:

1,350 kPa (13.5 kg/cm2, 192 psi)

T

R

.

.

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1.Place the machine on a level surface.

2.Start the engine, warm it up until the engine

oil has reached a normal temperature of

60 °C (140 °F), let it continue to idle for ten

seconds, and then turn the engine off.

NOTE:

To achieve the proper engine oil temperature

for an accurate oil level reading, the engine

must have first completely cooled down, and

then warmed up again for several minutes to

normal operating temperature.

3 — 20

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL/

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL

3.Check:

Engine oil level

Oil level should be between the minimum

level mark a and the maximum level mark

b.

Low oil level Add oil to the proper level.

NOTE:

Wait a few minutes until the oil settles before

inspecting the oil level.

Do not screw the dipstick 1 in when inspect-

ing the oil level.

NOTE:

Recommended oil classification:

API Service “SE”, “SF”, “SG” type or equiva-

lent (e.g. “SF–SE–CC”, “SF–SE–SD” etc.)

CAUTION:

Do not add any chemical additives.

Engine oil also lubricates the clutch and

additives could cause clutch slippage.

Do not allow foreign material to enter the

crankcase.

4.Start the engine and let it warm up for sev-

eral minutes.

5.Stop the engine and inspect the oil level

again.

NOTE:

Wait a few minutes until the oil settles before

inspecting the oil level.

Recommended oil:

Follow the left chart.

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL

1.Remove:

Engine skid plate

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Start the engine and let it warm up for sev-

eral minutes.

3.Stop the engine and place a container under

the engine oil drain bolt.

3 — 21

CHK

ADJ

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL

4.Remove:

Dipstick 1

Engine oil drain bolt (oil tank) 2

Engine oil drain bolt (crankcase) 3

Drain the engine oil from the oil tank and

crankcase.

5.If the oil filter cartridge is also to be replaced,

perform the following procedure.

***********************************************

Replacement steps:

Remove the oil filter cartridge 1 with an oil

filter wrench 2.

Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-ring

3 of the new oil filter cartridge.

CAUTION:

Make sure that the O-ring 3 is properly

seated in the groove of the oil filter car-

tridge.

Oil filter wrench:

P/N. YM-01469, 90890-01469

3 — 22

CHK

ADJ

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL

Tighten the new oil filter cartridge to specifi-

cation with an oil filter wrench.

***********************************************

6.Install:

Engine oil drain bolt (crankcase)

Engine oil drain bolt (oil tank)

7.Fill:

Oil tank

(with the specified amount of the recom-

mended engine oil)

NOTE:

Pour the engine oil in several stages.

First, pour in 1.75 L (1.54 Imp qt, 1.85 US qt)

of oil, and then start the engine and rev it 3 to

5 times. Stop the engine, and then pour in

the remainder of the specified amount.

CAUTION:

When starting the engine make sure the

dipstick is securely fitted into the oil tank.

8.Install:

Dipstick

9.Warm up the engine for a few minutes, then

stop the engine.

10.Check:

Engine

(for engine oil leaks)

Oil level

Refer to “CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

LEVEL”.

T

R

.

.

Oil filter cartridge:

17 Nm (1.7 m • kg, 12 ft • lb)

Quantity:

Total amount:

2.3 L (2.02 Imp qt, 2.43 US qt)

Periodic oil replacement:

1.9 L (1.67 Imp qt, 2.01 US qt)

With oil filter cartridge replace-

ment:

1.95 L (1.72 Imp qt, 2.06 US qt)

T

R

.

.

30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

25 Nm (2.5 m • kg, 18 ft • lb)

3 — 23

CHK

ADJ

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL/

ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE

11.Check:

Engine oil pressure

***********************************************

Slightly loosen the oil gallery bolt 1.

Start the engine and keep it idling until

engine oil starts to seep from the oil gallery

bolt. If no engine oil comes out after one

minute, turn the engine off so that it will not

seize.

Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter

cartridge and the oil pump for damage or

leakage.

Refer to “OIL PUMP” in CHAPTER 5.

Start the engine after solving the problem(s)

and check the engine oil pressure again.

Tighten the oil gallery bolt to specification.

***********************************************

12.Install:

Engine skid plate

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

T

R

.

.

Oil gallery bolt:

7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)

ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE

1.Check:

Clutch lever free play a

Out of specification Adjust.

Clutch lever free play

(at the clutch lever end):

5 ~ 10 mm (0.20 ~ 0.39 in)

3 — 24

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE/

CLEANING THE AIR FILTER

2.Adjust:

Clutch lever free play

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Pull the rubber cover 1 off.

Loosen the locknut 2 and finger tighten the

adjusting bolt 3.

Loosen the locknut 4.

Turn the adjusting nut 5 until the clutch lever

free play is within the specified limits.

Tighten the locknut 4.

NOTE:

If the specified clutch lever free play cannot be

obtained on it, use the adjusting bolt 3.

Turn the adjusting bolt 3 until the clutch

lever free play is within the specified limits.

Tighten the locknut 2.

Pull the rubber cover 1 in.

***********************************************

Clutch lever free play

(at the clutch lever end):

5 ~ 10 mm (0.20 ~ 0.39 in)

CLEANING THE AIR FILTER

NOTE:

There is a check hose 1 at the bottom of the

air filter case. If dust and/or water collects in

this hose, clean the air filter element and air fil-

ter case.

1.Remove:

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Disconnect:

Crankcase breather hose 1

3.Remove:

Air filter case cover 2

3 — 25

CHK

ADJ

CLEANING THE AIR FILTER

4.Remove:

Air filter element assembly 1

Air filter element cap 2

Air filter element 3

NOTE:

When removing the air filter element, rotate

the air filter element cap 1/4 of a turn and

remove the element.

CAUTION:

Never operate the engine with the air filter

element removed. This will allow unfiltered

air to enter, causing rapid wear and possible

engine damage. Additionally, operation

without the filter element will affect carbure-

tor tuning with subsequent poor perfor-

mance and possible engine overheating.

5.Check:

Air filter element

Damaged Replace.

6.Clean:

Air filter element

***********************************************

Cleaning steps:

Wash the element gently, but thoroughly in

solvent.

WARNING

Use a cleaning solvent which is designed

to clean parts only. Never use gasoline or

low flash point solvents as they may cause

a fire or explosion.

Squeeze the excess solvent out of the ele-

ment and let it dry.

3 — 26

CHK

ADJ

CLEANING THE AIR FILTER

CAUTION:

Do not twist or wring out the element. This

could damage the foam material.

Apply engine oil to the element.

Squeeze out the excess oil.

NOTE:

The element should be wet but not dripping.

***********************************************

7.Install:

Air filter element

Air filter case cover

NOTE:

Insert the lobes 1 on the filter element into

the receptacles 2 on the filter case.

To prevent air leaks make sure that the seal-

ing surface of the element matches the seal-

ing surface of the case.

8.Connect:

Crankcase breather hose 1

9.Install:

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

3 — 27

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL

1.Place the machine on a level surface.

2.Check:

Coolant level

The coolant level should be between the

minimum level mark a and maximum level

mark b.

Below the minimum level mark Add the

recommended coolant to the proper level.

CAUTION:

Adding water instead of coolant lowers

the antifreeze content of the coolant. If

water is used instead of coolant, check

and if necessary, correct the antifreeze

concentration of the coolant.

Use only distilled water. However, soft

water may be used if distilled water is not

available.

3.Start the engine, warm it up for several min-

utes, and then turn it off.

4.Check:

Coolant level

NOTE:

Before inspecting the coolant level, wait a few

minutes until the coolant has settled.

CHANGING THE COOLANT

1.Remove:

Front panel

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Remove:

Coolant reservoir cap 1

3.Disconnect:

Coolant reservoir hose 2

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL/

CHANGING THE COOLANT

3 — 28

CHK

ADJ

CHANGING THE COOLANT

4.Drain:

Coolant

(from the coolant reservoir)

5.Connect:

Coolant reservoir hose

6.Remove:

Radiator cap 1

WARNING

A hot radiator is under pressure. Therefore,

do not remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot fluid and steam

may be blown out, which could cause seri-

ous injury. When the engine has cooled,

open the radiator cap as follows:

Place a thick rag or a towel over the radia-

tor cap and slowly turn the radiator cap

counterclockwise toward the detent to

allow any residual pressure to escape.

When the hissing sound has stopped, turn

the radiator cap counterclockwise while

pressing down on it and then remove it.

7.Remove:

Coolant drain bolt 1

(along with the copper washer)

8.Drain:

Coolant

9.Check:

Copper washer 1

Coolant drain bolt 2

Damage Replace.

10.Install:

Coolant drain bolt

New

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

3 — 29

CHK

ADJ

CHANGING THE COOLANT

11.Fill:

Cooling system

(with the specified amount of the recom-

mended coolant)

Handling notes for coolant

Coolant is potentially harmful and should be

handled with special care.

WARNING

If coolant splashes in your eyes, thor-

oughly wash them with water and consult

a doctor.

If coolant splashes on your clothes,

quickly wash it away with water and then

with soap and water.

If coolant is swallowed, induce vomiting

and get immediate medical attention.

CAUTION:

Adding water instead of coolant lowers

the antifreeze content of the coolant. If

water is used instead of coolant, check,

and if necessary, correct the antifreeze

concentration of the coolant.

Use only distilled water. However, soft

water may be used if distilled water is not

available.

If coolant comes into contact with painted

surfaces, immediately wash them with

water.

Do not mix different types of antifreeze.

12.Install:

Radiator cap

Recommended antifreeze:

High-quality ethylene glycol

antifreeze containing corrosion

inhibitors for aluminum engines

Mixing ratio:

1:1 (antifreeze:water)

Quantity:

Total amount:

1.3 L

(1.14 lmp qt, 1.37 US qt)

Coolant reservoir capacity:

0.29 L

(0.26 lmp qt, 0.31 US qt)

3 — 30

CHK

ADJ

CHANGING THE COOLANT

13.Fill:

Coolant reservoir

(with the recommended coolant to the proper

level)

14.Install:

Coolant reservoir cap

15.Start the engine, warm it up for several min-

utes, and then turn it off.

16.Check:

Coolant level

Refer to “CHECKING THE COOLANT

LEVEL”.

NOTE:

Before inspecting the coolant level, wait a few

minutes until the coolant has settled.

17.Install:

Front panel

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

3 — 31

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING

LIGHT/CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER

CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

WARNING LIGHT

1Coolant temperature warning light

CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER

1.Clean:

Spark arrester

***********************************************

Cleaning steps:

WARNING

Select a well-ventilated area free of com-

bustible materials.

Always let the exhaust system cool

before performing this operation.

Do not start the engine when removing

the tailpipe from the muffler.

Remove the bolt 1.

Remove the tailpipe 2 by pulling it out of the

muffler.

3 — 32

CHK

ADJ

Tap the tailpipe lightly with a soft-face ham-

mer or suitable tool, then use a wire brush to

remove any carbon deposits from the spark

arrester portion of the tailpipe and the inner

contact surfaces of the muffler.

Insert the tailpipe into the muffler and align

the bolt holes.

Insert the bolt and tighten it.

Remove the purging bolt 3.

Start the engine and rev it up approximately

twenty times while momentarily creating

exhaust system back pressure by blocking

the end of the muffler with a shop towel.

Stop the engine and allow the exhaust pipe

to cool.

Install the purging bolt 3 and tighten it.

***********************************************

CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER

3 — 33

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE/

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE

CHASSIS

ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE

1.Check:

Brake lever free play a

Out of specification Bleed the front brake

system.

Refer to “AIR BLEEDING (HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM)”.

Brake lever free play (at the brake

lever end):

0 mm (0 in)

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE

1.Check:

Rear brake pedal height a

Out of specification Adjust.

2.Adjust:

Rear brake pedal height

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Loosen the locknut 1.

Turn the adjusting bolt 2 until the brake

pedal height is within the specified limits.

Tighten the locknut 1.

NOTE:

When adjusting the brake pedal height make

sure the locknut-to-adjusting bolt clearance a

does not exceed 2.2 ~ 3.2 mm (0.09 ~ 0.13 in).

Rear brake pedal height:

4 mm (0.16 in)

Brake pedal height:

4 mm (0.16 in)

3 — 34

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE/

ADJUSTING THE PARKING BRAKE

WARNING

After this adjustment is performed, lift the

rear wheels off the ground by placing a

block under the engine, and spin the rear

wheels to ensure there is no brake drag. If

any brake drag is noticed perform the

above steps again.

***********************************************

ADJUSTING THE PARKING BRAKE

1.Check:

Parking brake cable end length a

Out of specification Adjust.

Parking brake cable end length:

64 ~ 68 mm (2.5 ~ 2.7 in)

2.Adjust:

Parking brake cable end length

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Loosen the locknut 1 and adjusting bolt 2.

Pull the rubber cover 3 off.

Loosen the locknut 4.

Turn the adjuster 5 in or out until the speci-

fied brake cable end length is obtained.

Tighten the locknut 4.

Slowly turn the adjusting bolt 2 clockwise

until resistance is felt.

Turn it 1/8 counterclockwise.

Tighten the locknut 1.

Check the parking brake cable free play a.

If the free play is incorrect, adjust the free

play by adjuster 5.

Pull the rubber cover 3 in.

T

R

.

.

Locknut:

16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)

Free play (parking brake cable):

0 mm (0 in)

at parking brake lever pivot

3 — 35

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE PARKING BRAKE/

CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

WARNING

After this adjustment is performed, lift the

rear wheels off the ground by placing a

block under the engine, and spin the rear

wheels to ensure there is no brake drag. If

any brake drag is noticed perform the

above steps again.

***********************************************

CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

1.Place the machine on a level surface.

NOTE:

When inspecting the brake fluid level, make

sure that the top of the brake fluid reservoir top

is horizontal.

2.Check:

Brake fluid level

Fluid level is below the “LOWER” level line

1 Add the recommended brake fluid to

the proper level.

ÈFront brake

ÉRear brake

CAUTION:

Brake fluid may erode painted surfaces or

plastic parts. Always clean up spilled fluid

immediately.

WARNING

Use only the designated quality brake

fluid: Otherwise, the rubber seals may

deteriorate, causing leakage and poor

brake performance.

Refill with the same type of brake fluid:

Mixing fluids may result in a harmful

chemical reaction and lead to poor perfor-

mance.

Be careful that water does not enter the

master cylinder when refilling. Water will

significantly lower the boiling point of the

fluid and may result in a vapor lock.

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

È

É

3 — 36

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PAD/

CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PAD/

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PAD

1.Remove:

Front wheels

2.Check:

Brake pad

Wear indicators 1 almost in contact with the

brake disc Replace the brake pads as a

set.

Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in

CHAPTER 4.

3.Operate the brake lever.

4.Install:

Front wheels

Brake pad wear limit a:

1 mm (0.04 in)

CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PAD

1.Check:

Brake pad

Wear indicators 1 almost in contact with the

brake disc Replace the brake pads as a

set.

Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in

CHAPTER 4.

2.Operate the brake pedal.

Brake pad wear limit a:

1 mm (0.04 in)

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT

SWITCH

NOTE:

The rear brake light switch is operated by

movement of the brake pedal.

The rear brake light switch is properly adjusted

when the brake light comes on just before the

braking effect starts.

3 — 37

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH/

CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSE

1.Check:

Rear brake light operation timing

Incorrect Adjust.

2.Adjust:

Rear brake light operation timing

***********************************************

Hold the main body 1 of the rear brake light

switch so that it does not rotate and turn the

adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b until the

rear brake light comes on at the proper time.

***********************************************

Direction a Brake light comes on

sooner.

Direction b Brake light comes on

later.

CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSE

1.Remove:

Seat

Front fender

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Check:

Front brake hoses 1

Rear brake hoses 2

Cracks/wear/damage Replace.

3.Check:

Brake hose clamp

Loosen Tighten.

4.Hold the machine in an upright position and

apply the front or rear brake.

5.Check:

Brake hoses

Apply the brake lever several times.

Fluid leakage Replace the hose.

Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKE” in

CHAPTER 4.

3 — 38

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSE/

BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM

6.Install:

Front fender

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE

SYSTEM

WARNING

Bleed the brake system if:

The system has been disassembled.

A brake hose or brake pipe have been

loosened or removed.

The brake fluid has been very low.

The brake operation has been faulty.

A loss of braking performance may occur if

the brake system is not properly bled.

1.Bleed:

Brake system

***********************************************

Air bleeding steps:

a. Add the proper brake fluid to the reservoir.

b. Install the diaphragm. Be careful not to spill

any fluid or allow the reservoir to overflow.

c. Connect the clear plastic hose 1 tightly to

the caliper bleed screw 2.

ÈFront

ÉRear

d. Place the other end of the hose into a con-

tainer.

e. Slowly apply the brake lever or pedal sev-

eral times.

f. Pull the lever in or push down on the pedal

and hold it.

g. Loosen the bleed screw and allow the lever

or pedal to travel towards its limit.

h. Tighten the bleed screw when the lever or

pedal limit has been reached, then release

the lever or pedal.

i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all the air bub-

bles have disappeared from the fluid.

È

É

3 — 39

CHK

ADJ

j. Tighten the bleed screw.

NOTE:

If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to

let the brake fluid settle for a few hours.

Repeat the bleeding procedure when the tiny

bubbles in the system have disappeared.

k. Add brake fluid to the proper level.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL”.

WARNING

Check the operation of the brake after

bleeding the brake system.

***********************************************

T

R

.

.

Bleed screw:

6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • lb)

ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL

1.Check:

Shift pedal height a

Out of specification Adjust.

Shift pedal height:

22 mm (0.89 in)

2.Adjust:

Shift pedal height

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Loosen the locknuts 1.

Turn the adjusting rod 2 in direction a or b

until the specified shift pedal position

obtained.

Tighten the locknuts.

***********************************************

Direction a Shift pedal position is

down.

Direction b Shift pedal position is

up.

T

R

.

.

Locknut:

8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)

BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM/

ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL

3 — 40

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE REVERSE CONTROL CABLE/

ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK

ADJUSTING THE REVERSE CONTROL

CABLE

1.Check:

Reverse knob free play a

Out of specification Adjust.

Reverse knob free play:

0 mm (0 in)

2.Adjust:

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Pull the boots 1 and 2 off.

Loosen the locknut 3.

Turn the adjusting nut 4 until the reverse

control cable 5 is taut or the length a is

135 mm (5.31 in).

NOTE:

Be sure to hold the reverse shift lever 6 when

make this adjustment so that it does not move.

Tighten the locknut 3.

Pull the boots 1 and 2 in.

***********************************************

ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK

NOTE:

The drive chain slack must be checked at the

tightest point on the chain.

CAUTION:

A drive chain that is too tight will overload

the engine and other vital parts, and one

that is too loose can skip and damage the

swingarm or cause an accident. Therefore,

keep the drive chain slack within the speci-

fied limits.

1.Elevate the rear wheels by placing the suit-

able stand under the frame.

2.Rotate the rear wheel several times and

check the drive chain to locate its tightest

point.

3 — 41

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK

3.Measure:

Drive chain slack a

Out of specification Adjust.

Drive chain slack:

30 ~ 45 mm (1.18 ~ 1.77 in)

4.Adjust:

Drive chain slack

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Loosen the hub nuts 1.

Loosen the locknuts 2.

Turn both adjusting bolts 3 in direction a or

b until the specified drive chain slack is

obtained.

NOTE:

To maintain the proper axle alignment, adjust

both sides evenly. (There are marks c on

each side of hub.)

CAUTION:

Excessive chain slack will overload the

engine and other vital parts; keep the slack

within the specified limits.

If the chain slack cannot be adjusted, replace

the sprockets and drive chain as a set.

Tighten the hub nuts and locknuts.

NOTE:

The chain should be cleaned and lubricated

after every use of the machine.

***********************************************

Direction a Drive chain slack is

reduced.

Direction b Drive chain slack is

increased.

T

R

.

.

Hub nut:

90 Nm (9.0 m • kg, 65 ft • lb)

Locknut (chain puller):

16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)

3 — 42

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM/

ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN

CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM

1.Place the machine on a level surface.

2.Check:

Steering assembly bushings

Move the handlebar up and down, and/or

back and forth.

Excessive play Replace the steering stem

bushings.

3.Check:

Tie-rod ends

Turn the handlebar to the left and/or right

until it stops completely, then move the han-

dlebar from the left to the right slightly. Tie-

rod end has any vertical play Replace the

tie-rod end(s).

4.Raise the front end of the machine so that

there is no weight on the front wheels.

5.Check:

Ball joints and/or wheel bearings

Move the wheels laterally back and forth.

Excessive free play Replace the front

arms (upper and lower) and/or wheel bear-

ings.

ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN

1.Place the machine on a level surface.

2.Measure:

Toe-in

Out of specification Adjust.

Toe-in:

0 ~ 10 mm (0 ~ 0.39 in)

3 — 43

CHK

ADJ

***********************************************

Toe-in measurement steps:

NOTE:

Before measuring the toe-in, make sure that

the tire pressure is correct.

Mark both front tire tread centers.

Raise the front end of the machine so that

there is no weight on the front tires.

Face the handlebar straight ahead.

Measure the width È between the marks.

Rotate the front tires 180° until the marks are

exactly opposite one another.

Measure the width É between the marks.

Calculate the toe-in using the formula given

below.

If the toe-in is incorrect, adjust it.

ÊForward

***********************************************

3.Adjust:

Toe-in

WARNING

Be sure that both tie-rods are turned the

same amount. If not, the machine will drift

right or left even though the handlebar is

positioned straight. This may lead to mis-

handling and an accident.

After setting the toe-in to specification, run

the machine slowly for some distance with

both hands lightly holding the handlebar

and check that the handlebar responds cor-

rectly. If not, turn either the right or left tie-

rod within the toe-in specification.

Toe-in = ÉÈ

ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN

3 — 44

CHK

ADJ

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Mark both tie-rods ends.

This reference point will be needed during

adjustment.

Loosen the locknuts (tie-rod end) 1 of both

tie-rods.

The same number of turns should be given

to both the right and left tie-rods 2 until the

specified toe-in is obtained. This is to keep

the length of the rods the same.

Tighten the rod end locknuts of both tie rods.

NOTE:

Adjust the rod ends so that A and B are equal.

***********************************************

T

R

.

.

Locknut (rod end):

15 Nm (1.5 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)

ADJUSTING THE FRONT SHOCK

ABSORBER

WARNING

Always adjust both front shock absorber

spring preload to the same setting. Uneven

adjustment can cause poor handling and

loss of stability.

1.Adjust:

Spring preload

Turn the adjuster 1 in direction a or b.

Direction a Spring preload is

increased (suspension

is harder).

Direction b Spring preload is

decreased (suspension

is softer).

Standard position: 3

Minimum position: 1

Maximum position: 5

ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN/

ADJUSTING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER

3 — 45

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK

ABSORBER

1.Adjust:

Spring preload

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Elevate the rear wheels by placing a suitable

stand under the frame.

Loosen the locknut 1.

Turn the adjusting ring 2 in direction a or

b.

NOTE:

Be sure to remove all dirt and mud from

around the locknut and adjusting ring before

adjustment.

The length of the spring (installed) changes

1.5 mm (0.06 in) per turn of the adjuster.

CAUTION:

Never attempt to turn the adjusting ring

beyond the maximum or minimum setting.

Tighten the locknut 1.

NOTE:

Always tighten the locknut against the adjust-

ing ring, then torque it to specification.

***********************************************

Direction a Spring preload is

increased (suspension

is harder).

Direction b Spring preload is

decreased (suspension

is softer).

Adjusting length c:

Standard: 253 mm (9.96 in)

Minimum: 245 mm (9.65 in)

Maximum: 260 mm (10.24 in)

T

R

.

.

Locknut:

42 Nm (4.2 m • kg, 30 ft • lb)

ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

3 — 46

CHK

ADJ

2.Adjust:

Rebound damping force

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or

b.

CAUTION:

Do not force the adjuster past the minimum

or maximum extent of adjustment. The

adjuster may be damaged.

***********************************************

Direction a Rebound damping force

is increased.

Direction b Rebound damping force

is decreased.

From the fully turned-in position:

Standard: 10 clicks out

Minimum: 20 clicks out

Maximum: 3 clicks out

3.Adjust:

Compression damping force

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or

b.

Direction a Compression damping

force is increased.

Direction b Compression damping

force is decreased.

From the fully turned-out position:

Standard: 7 clicks in

Minimum: 1 click in

Maximum: 12 clicks in

ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

3 — 47

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER/

CHECKING THE TIRE

CAUTION:

Do not forc the adjuster past the minimum

or maximum extent of adjustment. The

adjuster may be damaged.

***********************************************

CHECKING THE TIRE

WARNING

This model is equipped with low pressure

tires. It is important that they be inflated cor-

rectly and maintained at the proper pressures.

TIRE CHARACTERISTICS

1)Tire characteristics influence the handling

of ATV’s. The tires listed below have been

approved by Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. for

this model. If other tire combinations are

used, they can adversely affect your

machine’s handling characteristics and

are therefore not recommended.

TIRE PRESSURE

1)Recommended tire pressure

Front 27.5 kPa (0.275 kg/cm2, 4.0 psi)

Rear 27.5 kPa (0.275 kg/cm2, 4.0 psi)

2)Tire pressure below the minimum specifi-

cation could cause the tire to dislodge

from the rim under severe riding condi-

tions.

The following are minimums:

Front 24.5 kPa (0.245 kg/cm2, 3.5 psi)

Rear 24.5 kPa (0.245 kg/cm2, 3.5 psi)

3)Use no more than

Front 250 kPa (2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi)

Rear 250 kPa (2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi)

when seating the tire beads. Higher pres-

sures may cause the tire to burst.

Inflate the tires slowly and carefully.

Fast inflation could cause the tire to

burst.

Manufacturer Size Type

Front DUNLOP AT21×7-10 KT311

Radial

Rear DUNLOP AT20×10-9 KT335

Radial

3 — 48

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE TIRE

MAXIMUM LOADING LIMIT

1)Vehicle load limit (total weight of cargo,

rider and accessories, and tongue

weight): 100 kg (220 lb)

1.Measure:

Tire pressure (cold tire pressure)

Out of specification Adjust.

NOTE:

The low-pressure tire gauge 1 is included

as standard equipment.

If dust or the like is stuck to this gauge, it will

not provide the correct readings. Therefore,

take two measurements of the tire’s pressure

and use the second reading.

WARNING

Uneven or improper tire pressure may

adversely affect the handling of this

machine and may cause loss of control.

Maintain proper tire pressures.

Set tire pressures when the tires are cold.

Tire pressures must be equal in both front

tires and equal in both rear tires.

Cold tire

pressure Front Rear

Standard 27.5 kPa

(0.275 kg/cm2,

4.0 psi)

27.5 kPa

(0.275 kg/cm2,

4.0 psi)

Minimum 24.5 kPa

(0.245 kg/cm2,

3.5 psi)

24.5 kPa

(0.245 kg/cm2,

3.5 psi)

Maximum 30.5 kPa

(0.305 kg/cm2,

4.4 psi)

30.5 kPa

(0.305 kg/cm2,

4.4 psi)

3 — 49

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE TIRE/CHECKING THE WHEEL/

CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLE

2.Check:

Tire surfaces

Wear/damage Replace.

WARNING

It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire.

When tire wear is out of specification,

replace the tire immediately.

Tire wear limit a:

Front and rear: 3.0 mm (0.12 in)

CHECKING THE WHEEL

1.Check:

Wheels 1

Damage/bends Replace.

NOTE:

Always balance the wheel when a tire or wheel

has been changed or replaced.

WARNING

Never attempt even small repairs to the

wheel.

Ride conservatively after installing a tire

to allow it to seat itself properly on the

rim.

CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE

CABLE

WARNING

A damaged cable sheath may cause corro-

sion and interfere with the cable move-

ment. An unsafe condition may result so

replace a damaged cable as soon as possi-

ble.

3 — 50

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLE/

LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDAL

1.Check:

Cable sheath

Damage Replace.

2.Check:

Cable operation

Unsmooth operation Lubricate or replace.

NOTE:

Hold the cable end up and apply several drops

of lubricant to the cable.

3.Apply:

Lithium soap base grease

(onto end of the cable)

Recommended lubricant:

Yamaha chain and cable lube or

Engine oil

LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDAL

1.Lubricate the pivoting parts.

Recommended lubricant:

Lithium soap base grease

3 — 51

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE BATTERY

EB305000

ELECTRICAL

CHECKING THE BATTERY

NOTE:

Since the MF battery is a sealed type battery, it

is not possible to measure the specific gravity

of the electrolyte in order to check the charge

state of the battery. Therefore the charge of

the battery has to be checked by measuring

the voltage at the battery terminals.

CAUTION:

CHARGING METHOD

This is a sealed type battery. Never

remove the sealing caps. If the sealing

caps have been removed, the balance will

not be maintained and battery perfor-

mance will deteriorate.

Charging time, charging current and

charging voltage for the MF battery are

different from those of general type bat-

teries. The MF battery should be charged

as explained in “CHARGING METHOD”. If

the battery is overcharged, the electrolyte

level will drop considerably. Therefore,

take special care when charging the bat-

tery.

WARNING

Battery electrolyte is dangerous; it con-

tains sulfuric acid which is poisonous and

highly caustic.

Always follow these preventive measures:

Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it

can cause severe burns or permanent eye

injury.

Wear protective eye gear when handling

or working near batteries.

Antidote (EXTERNAL):

SKIN — Wash with water.

EYES — Flush with water for 15 minutes

and get immediate medical attention.

Antidote (INTERNAL):

Drink large quantities of water or milk fol-

lowed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg

or vegetable oil. Get immediate medical

attention.

3 — 52

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE BATTERY

Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas.

Always follow these preventive measures:

Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area.

Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or

open flames (e.g., welding equipment,

lighted cigarettes, etc.).

DO NOT SMOKE when charging or han-

dling batteries.

KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE

OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.

1.Remove:

Seat

Battery holding bracket

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Disconnect:

Battery leads

CAUTION:

First disconnect the negative lead 1, then

disconnect the positive lead 2.

3.Remove:

Battery

4.Check:

Battery condition

***********************************************

Battery condition checking steps:

Connect a digital voltmeter to the battery ter-

minals.

NOTE:

The charge state of an MF battery can be

checked by measuring the open-circuit voltage

(i.e. the voltage when the positive terminal is

disconnected).

Tester (+) lead battery (+) terminal

Tester (–) lead battery (–) terminal

Open-circuit

voltage Charging time

12.8 V or higher No charging is

necessary.

3 — 53

CHK

ADJ

Check the condition of the battery using the

following charts.

Example:

Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V

Charging time = 6.5 hours

Charge condition of the battery = 20 ~ 30%

Charging method for MF batteries

CAUTION:

If it is impossible to set the standard

charging current, be careful not to over-

charge.

When charging the battery, be sure to

remove it from the motorcycle. (If charg-

ing has to be done with the battery

mounted on the motorcycle, be sure to

disconnect the wire at the negative termi-

nal.)

Never remove the sealing caps of an MF

battery.

Make sure that the charging clips are in

full contact with the terminal and that they

are not shorted together. (A corroded clip

on the charger may cause the battery to

generate heat in the contact area. A weak

clip spring may cause sparks.)

Before removing the clips from the bat-

tery terminals, be sure to turn off the

charger’s power switch.

The open-circuit voltage variation for the

MF battery, after charging, is shown

below. As shown in the figure, the open-

circuit voltage stabilizes about 30 min-

utes after charging has been completed.

Therefore, wait 30 minutes after charging

is completed before measuring the open-

circuit voltage.

***********************************************

CHECKING THE BATTERY

3 — 54

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE BATTERY

Charging method using a variable voltage charger

3 — 55

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE BATTERY

Charging method using a constant voltage charger

3 — 56

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE BATTERY/CHECKING THE FUSE

5.Check:

Battery terminals

Dirty Clean with a wire brush.

Poor connection Correct.

NOTE:

After cleaning the terminals, apply a light coat

of grease.

6.Install:

Battery

7.Connect:

Battery leads

CAUTION:

First, connect the positive lead 1, then

connect the negative lead 2.

8.Install:

Battery holding bracket

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

CHECKING THE FUSE

CAUTION:

Always turn off the main switch when

checking or replacing a fuse. Otherwise, a

short circuit may occur.

1.Remove:

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Check:

Fuse

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and

check it for continuity.

3 — 57

CHK

ADJ

CHECKING THE FUSE

NOTE:

Set the tester to the “ × 1” position.

If the tester indicates 0, replace the fuse.

***********************************************

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

3.Replace:

Blown fuse

***********************************************

Replacement steps:

Turn off the ignition.

Install a new fuse of the proper amperage.

Turn on switches to verify operation of the

related electrical devices.

If the fuse immediately blows again, check

the electrical circuit.

***********************************************

WARNING

Never use a fuse with a rating other than

that specified. Never use other materials in

place of a fuse. An improper fuse may

cause extensive damage to the electrical

system, a malfunction of the lighting and

ignition systems and could possibly cause

a fire.

4.Install:

Seat

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

Description Current rating Quantity

Main 20 A 1

Reserve 20 A 1

3 — 58

CHK

ADJ

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM/

REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM

1.Adjust:

Headlight beam (vertically)

***********************************************

Adjustment steps:

Loosen the screw 1.

Slide the headlight lens unit under.

Tighten the screw 1.

***********************************************

Slide forward Headlight beam raises.

Slide backward Headlight beam low-

ers.

REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB

1.Remove:

Headlight

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

2.Remove:

Cover 1

Headlight unit 2

Case 3

NOTE:

Pull outward on the rear of the headlight unit

2, and then pull out ward on the front.

3 — 59

CHK

ADJ

REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB

3.Remove:

Cover 1

Bulb holder 2

Bulb

NOTE:

Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

remove the defective bulb.

WARNING

Keep flammable products and your hands

away from the bulb while it is on, since it

will be hot. Do not touch the bulb until it

cools down.

4.Install:

Bulb

Secure the new bulb with the headlight unit.

CAUTION:

Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb.

Keep it free from oil; otherwise, the trans-

parency of the glass, life of the bulb, and

luminous flux will be adversely affected. If

oil gets on the bulb, thoroughly clean it

with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lac-

quer thinner.

5.Install:

Bulb holder

Cover

Cover

6.Install:

Headlight

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK”.

New

4 — 1

CHAS

FRONT WHEELS

CHASSIS

FRONT WHEELS

FRONT WHEELS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the front wheel Remove the parts in the order below.

Place the machine on a level surface.

WARNING

Securely support the machine so there

is no danger of it falling over.

1 Cotter pin 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE WHEEL

HUB”.

2 Axle nut 1

3 Front wheel 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE WHEEL”.

4 Brake disc guard (outer) 1

5 Brake caliper assembly 1 NOTE:

Do not apply the brake lever after the

brake calipers have been removed, other-

wise the brake pads will be forced shut.

4 — 2

CHAS

FRONT WHEELS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

6 Wheel hub 1

7 Brake disc 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 3

CHAS

FRONT WHEELS

CHECKING THE WHEEL

1.Check:

Wheel

2.Measure:

Wheel runout

Over the specified limit Replace the wheel

or check the wheel bearing play 1.

3.Check:

Wheel balance

Out of balance Adjust.

Wheel runout limit:

Radial 2: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

Lateral 3: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

WARNING

After replacing the tire, ride conservatively

to allow the tire to be properly seated in the

rim. Failure to do so may cause an accident

resulting in machine damage and possible

operator injury.

CHECKING THE WHEEL HUB

1.Check:

Wheel hub 1

Cracks/damage Replace.

4 — 4

CHAS

FRONT WHEELS

2.Check:

Wheel bearings

Wheel hub play/wheel turns roughly

Replace.

***********************************************

Wheel bearing replacement steps:

Clean wheel hub exterior.

Drive bearing out by pushing spacer aside

and tapping around perimeter of bearing

inner race. Use soft metal drift punch and

hammer. The spacer 1 “floats” between

bearings. Remove both bearings as

described.

WARNING

Eye protection is recommended when

using striking tools.

To install the wheel bearings, reverse the

above sequence. Use a socket that matches

outside diameter of bearing outer race to

drive in bearing.

CAUTION:

Do not strike the center race or balls of the

bearing. Contact should be made only with

the outer race.

***********************************************

CHECKING THE BRAKE DISC

1.Check:

Brake disc

Galling/damage Replace.

2.Measure:

Brake disc deflection

Out of specification Replace.

Brake disc thickness a

Out of specification Replace.

Brake disc maximum deflection:

0.15 mm (0.006 in)

Brake disc minimum thickness:

3 mm (0.12 in)

4 — 5

CHAS

FRONT WHEELS

INSTALLING WHEEL HUB

1.Install:

Axle nut 1

Cotter pin 2

NOTE:

Do not loosen the axle nut after torquing it. If

the axle nut groove is not aligned with the cot-

ter pin hole, align the groove with the hole by

tightening the axle nut.

T

R

.

.

70 Nm (7.0 m • kg, 50 ft • lb)

New

INSTALLING THE WHEEL

1.Install:

Brake disc guard (outer) 1

NOTE:

Install the brake disc guard (outer) with

punched burrs 2 on the wheel hub side.

2.Install:

Wheel

NOTE:

The arrow mark 1 on the tire must point in the

direction of rotation È of the wheel.

4 — 6

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

REAR WHEELS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the rear wheel Remove the parts in the order below.

Place the machine on a level surface.

WARNING

Securely support the machine so there

is no danger of it falling over.

1 Rear wheel 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE WHEEL”.

2 Cotter pin 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE WHEEL

HUB”.

3 Axle nut 2

4 Wheel hub 2

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 7

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the wheel axle and hub Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Nut 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE NUTS

(REAR AXLE)”.

2 Locknut 2 Refer to “REMOVING THE REAR AXLE”.

3 Adjusting bolt 2

4 Rear axle 1

5 Brake caliper 1 NOTE:

Do not apply the brake pedal and do not

use the parking brake when the brake

caliper is off of the brake disc as the

brake pad will be force shut.

4 — 8

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

6 Brake disc 1

7 Driven sprocket 1

8 Brake caliper bracket 1

9Hub 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 9

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

REMOVING THE REAR AXLE

1.Place the machine on a level surface.

2.Loosen:

Nuts (rear axle) 1

NOTE:

Apply the brake pedal so that the rear axle

does not turn, when loosening the nuts.

Use a axle nut wrench (50 mm) 2.

Axle nut wrench (50 mm):

P/N. YM-37132, 90890-01419

3.Elevate the rear wheels by placing the suit-

able stand under the frame.

4.Remove:

Rear wheels

Wheel hubs

Nuts (rear axle)

5.Loosen:

Hub nuts 1

6.Loosen:

Locknuts 1

Adjusting bolts 2

4 — 10

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

7.Remove:

Rear axle 1

CAUTION:

Never directly tap the axle end with a

hammer, since this will result in damage

to the axle thread and spline.

Attach a suitable socket 2 on the axle

end and tap it with a soft hammer. Pull out

the rear axle to the right.

CHECKING THE WHEEL

Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

CHECKING THE WHEEL HUB

1.Check:

Wheel hub 1

Cracks/damage Replace.

Splines (wheel hub) 2

Wear/damage Replace the wheel hub.

CHECKING THE REAR AXLE

1.Check:

Rear axle runout a

Out of specification Replace.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent axle.

Rear axle runout limit:

1.5 mm (0.06 in)

4 — 11

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

CHECKING THE HUB

1.Check:

Hub bearings

Refer to “FRONT WHEELS-WHEEL HUB

INSPECTION”.

CHECKING THE BRAKE DISC

Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

INSTALLING THE NUTS (REAR AXLE)

1.Tighten:

Nuts (rear axle) 1, 2

***********************************************

Nuts tightening steps:

NOTE:

Before tightening the nuts, apply the LOC-

TITE® to the thread portion of the rear axle.

Finger tighten the inside nut 1 while check-

ing the ring gear engagement.

Tighten the inside nut with rear axle nut

wrench to specification while holding the rear

axle.

Hold the inside nut 1 and tighten the outside

nut 2 with rear axle nut wrench to specifica-

tion.

Draw the line a on inside and outside nut.

Hold the outside nut 2 and tighten back the

inside nut 1 with rear axle nut wrench to

specification.

Measure the distance b between lines. If

distance b is less than 15 mm (0.59 in),

retighten back the inside nut.

***********************************************

Axle nut wrench (50 mm):

P/N. YM-37132, 90890-01419

T

R

.

.

Inside nut (first tightening):

55 Nm (5.5 m • kg, 40 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

Outside nut:

190 Nm (19.0 m • kg, 140 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

Inside nut (final tightening):

240 Nm (24.0 m • kg, 170 ft • lb)

4 — 12

CHAS

REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE AND HUB

INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUB

Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

INSTALLING THE WHEEL

1.Install:

Wheel

NOTE:

The wording on the tire “SIDE FACING OUT-

WARDS” 1 must be facing outwards.

4 — 13

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

FRONT BRAKE PADS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the front brake pad Remove the parts in the order below.

Front wheel/wheel hub Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

1 Brake pad holding bolt 2 Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONT

BRAKE PAD”.

2 Brake pad/pad shim 2/1

3 Brake pad spring 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 14

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

REAR BRAKE PADS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing rear brake pad Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Brake caliper mounting bolt 1

Refer to “REPLACING THE REAR

BRAKE PAD”.

2 Brake caliper mounting bolt 1

3 Brake pad holding bolt 2

4 Lock washer 1

5 Brake pad/pad shim 2/1

6 Brake pad spring 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 15

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

CAUTION:

Disc brake components rarely require dis-

assembly. DO NOT:

disassemble components unless abso-

lutely necessary;

use solvents on internal brake compo-

nents;

use spent brake fluid for cleaning; (use

only clean brake fluid)

allow brake fluid to come in contact with

the eyes, as this may cause eye injury;

splash brake fluid onto painted surfaces or

plastic parts, as this may cause damage;

disconnect any hydraulic connection, as

this would require the entire brake sys-

tem to be disassembled, drained,

cleaned, properly filled and bled after

reassembly.

REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PAD

NOTE:

It is not necessary to disassemble the brake

caliper and brake hose to replace the brake

pads.

1.Remove:

Brake pads

aWear limit

NOTE:

Replace the brake pads as a set if either is

found to be worn to the wear limit.

2.Install:

Brake pads

Brake pad spring

NOTE:

Always install new brake pads, brake pad shim

and brake pad spring as a set.

4 — 16

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

***********************************************

Installation steps:

Connect a suitable hose 1 tightly to the

brake caliper bleed screw 2. Put the other

end of this hose into an open container.

Loosen the brake caliper bleed screw and,

using a finger, push the caliper piston into

the brake caliper.

Tighten the brake caliper bleed screw.

Install new brake pads, new pad shim 3 and

a new brake pad spring.

Install the holding bolts and brake caliper.

NOTE:

The arrow mark a on the pad shim must point

in the direction of the disc rotation.

***********************************************

T

R

.

.

Brake caliper bleed screw:

6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

Brake pad holding bolt:

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)

Brake caliper mounting bolt:

28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)

3.Check:

Brake fluid level

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL” in CHAPTER 3.

4.Check:

Brake lever operation

Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the front

brake system.

Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM” in CHAPTER 3.

4 — 17

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PAD

NOTE:

It is not necessary to disassemble the brake

caliper and brake hose to replace the brake

pads.

1.Remove:

Brake pads

aWear limit

NOTE:

Replace the brake pads as a set if either is

found to be worn to the wear limit.

2.Install:

Brake pads

Brake pad spring

NOTE:

Always install new brake pads, brake pad shim

and brake pad spring as a set.

***********************************************

Installation steps:

Connect a suitable hose 1 tightly to the

brake caliper bleed screw 2. Put the other

end of this hose into an open container.

Loosen the brake caliper bleed screw and,

using a finger, push the caliper piston into

the brake caliper.

Tighten the brake caliper bleed screw.

Install new brake pads, new pad shim 3 and

a new brake pad spring.

Install a new lock washer, holding bolts and

brake caliper.

NOTE:

The arrow mark a on the pad shim must point

in the direction of the disc rotation.

T

R

.

.

Brake caliper bleed screw:

6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • lb)

4 — 18

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Bend the lock washer tabs along a flat side

of the bolts.

***********************************************

T

R

.

.

Brake pad holding bolt:

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)

Brake caliper mounting bolt:

28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)

3.Check:

Brake fluid level

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL” in CHAPTER 3.

4.Check:

Brake pedal operation

Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the rear

brake system.

Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM” in CHAPTER 3.

4 — 19

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing front brake master cylin-

der Remove the parts in the order below.

Brake fluid Drain.

1 Brake fluid reservoir cap 1

2 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 1

3 Front brake switch 1

4 Brake lever 1

5 Union bolt 1

Refer to “INSTALLING THE FRONT

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER”.

6 Copper washer 2

7 Brake hose 1

8 Brake master cylinder bracket 1

9 Brake master cylinder 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 20

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the front brake mas-

ter cylinder Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Dust boot 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONT

AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLIN-

DER”.

2 Circlip 1

3 Brake master cylinder kit 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

4 — 21

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the rear brake master cyl-

inder Remove the parts in the order below.

Right footrest guard Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Brake fluid Drain.

1 Brake fluid reservoir cover 1

2 Brake fluid reservoir cap 1

3 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm holder 1

4 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 1

5 Brake fluid reservoir 1

6 Brake fluid reservoir hose 1

7 Right footrest guard bracket 1

4 — 22

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

8 Union bolt 1

Refer to “INSTALLING THE REAR

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER”.

9 Copper washer 2

10 Brake hose 1

11 Brake master cylinder 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 23

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the rear brake mas-

ter cylinder Remove the parts in the order below.

1Hose joint 1

2Brake master cylinder kit 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONT

AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLIN-

DER”.

3Brake master cylinder 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

4 — 24

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

CHECKING THE MASTER CYLINDER

1.Check:

Brake master cylinder 1

Wear/scratches Replace the brake master

cylinder assembly.

Brake master cylinder body

Cracks/damage Replace.

Brake fluid delivery passage

(brake master cylinder body)

Blockage Blow out with compressed air.

ÈFront

ÉRear

È

É

2.Check:

Brake master cylinder kit

Scratches/wear/damage Replace as a set.

ÈFront

ÉRear

É

È

3.Check:

Front brake master cylinder reservoir 1

Front brake master cylinder reservoir dia-

phragm 2

Cracks/damage Replace.

4.Check:

Rear brake fluid reservoir 1

Rear brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 2

Cracks/damage Replace.

4 — 25

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

EB702060

ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

WARNING

All internal brake components should be

cleaned and lubricated with new brake

fluid only before installation.

Whenever a master cylinder is disassem-

bled, replace the piston seals and dust

seals.

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER

CYLINDER

1.Install:

Brake master cylinder 1

NOTE:

The “UP” mark on the brake master cylinder

bracket should face up.

T

R

.

.

7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)

2.Install:

Copper washers

Brake hose

Union bolt

NOTE:

Tighten the union bolt while holding the

brake hose as shown.

Turn the handlebar to the left and to the right

to check that the brake hose does not touch

other parts (throttle cable, wire harness,

leads, etc.). Correct if necessary.

WARNING

Proper brake hose routing is essential to

insure safe machine operation. Refer to

“CABLE ROUTING”.

New

T

R

.

.

27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)

4 — 26

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

3.Fill:

Brake fluid reservoir

CAUTION:

Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces

or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled

brake fluid immediately.

WARNING

Use only the designated quality brake

fluid: Other brake fluids may deteriorate

the rubber seals, causing leakage and

poor brake performance.

Refill with the same type of brake fluid:

Mixing brake fluids may result in a harm-

ful chemical reaction and lead to poor

brake performance.

Be careful that water does not enter the

brake master cylinder when refilling.

Water will significantly lower the boiling

point of the brake fluid and may result in

vapor lock.

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

4.Air bleed:

Brake system

Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM” in CHAPTER 3.

5.Check:

Brake fluid level

Brake fluid level is below the “LOWER” level

line Add the recomended brake fluid to the

proper level.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL” in CHAPTER 3.

4 — 27

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER

CYLINDER

1.Install:

Copper washers 1

Brake hose 2

Union bolt 3

CAUTION:

When installing the brake hose onto the

brake master cylinder, make sure the brake

pipe touches the projection a as shown.

WARNING

Proper brake hose routing is essential to

insure safe machine operation. Refer to

“CABLE ROUTING”.

2.Fill:

Brake fluid reservoir

CAUTION:

Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces

or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled

brake fluid immediately.

WARNING

Use only the designated quality brake

fluid: Other brake fluids may deteriorate

the rubber seals, causing leakage and

poor brake performance.

Refill with the same type of brake fluid:

Mixing brake fluids may result in a harm-

ful chemical reaction and lead to poor

brake performance.

Be careful that water does not enter the

brake master cylinder when refilling.

Water will significantly lower the boiling

point of the brake fluid and may result in

vapor lock.

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

New

T

R

.

.

30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)

4 — 28

CHAS

3.Air bleed:

Brake system

Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM” in CHAPTER 3.

4.Check:

Brake fluid level

Brake fluid level is below the “LOWER” level

line Add the recommended brake fluid to

the proper level.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL” in CHAPTER 3.

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

4 — 29

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the front brake caliper Remove the parts in the order below.

Brake fluid Drain.

Front wheel Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

1 Union bolt 1

Refer to “INSTALLING

THE FRONT BRAKE CAL-

IPER”.

2 Copper washer 2

3 Brake hose 1 Disconnect.

4 Cap/retaining bolt 1/1 Loosen.

5 Brake pad holding bolt 2 Loosen.

6 Brake caliper mounting bolt 2

7 Brake caliper assembly 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 30

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the front brake cali-

per Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Brake pad holding bolt 2

2 Brake pad/pad shim 2/1

3 Brake pad spring 1

4 Retaining bolt 1

5 Caliper bracket 1

6 Brake caliper piston 1 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT

AND REAR BRAKE CALIPER/ASSEM-

BLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER”.

7 Dust seal 1

8 Caliper piston seal 1

9 Bleed screw 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

4 — 31

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

REAR BRAKE CALIPER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the rear brake caliper Remove the parts in the order below.

Brake fluid Drain.

1 Parking brake cable 1 Disconnect.

2 Union bolt 1

Refer to “INSTALLING

THE REAR BRAKE CALI-

PER”.

3 Copper washer 2

4 Brake hose 1 Disconnect.

5 Brake caliper mounting bolt 1

6 Brake caliper mounting bolt 1

7 Brake caliper assembly 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 32

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the rear brake caliper Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Adjusting bolt 1

2 Locknut 1

3 Parking brake lever 1

4 Parking brake case mounting bolt 2

5 Parking brake case 1

6 Gasket 1

7 Spring 1

8 Nut 1

9Bearing 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE REAR

BRAKE CALIPER”.

0Brake pad holding bolt 2

ALock washer 1

4 — 33

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

B Brake pad/pad shim 2/1

C Brake pad spring 1

D Retaining bolt 1

E Caliper bracket 1

F Brake caliper piston 1 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT

AND REAR BRAKE CALIPER/ASSEM-

BLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER”.

G Dust seal 1

H Caliper piston seal 1

I O-ring 1

JBleed screw 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

4 — 34

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR

BRAKE CALIPER

1.Remove:

Brake caliper piston

Dust seal 1

Caliper piston seal 2

***********************************************

Removal steps:

Blow compressed air into the hose joint

opening to force out the caliper piston from

the brake caliper body.

WARNING

Never try to pry out the caliper piston.

Cover the caliper piston with a rag. Be

careful not to get injured when the piston

is expelled from the master cylinder.

Remove the caliper piston seals.

***********************************************

EB702040

CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE

CALIPER

WARNING

All internal brake components should be

cleaned in new brake fluid only. Do not use

solvents as they will cause seals to swell

and distort.

Recommended brake component

replacement schedule:

Brake pads As required

Piston seal, dust seal Every two years

Brake hoses Every two years

Brake fluid Replace when

brakes are disas-

sembled.

4 — 35

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

1.Check:

Brake caliper piston 1

Scratches/rust/wear Replace the brake

caliper assembly.

Brake caliper cylinder 2

Wear/scratches Replace the brake caliper

assembly.

Brake caliper body 3

Cracks/damage Replace.

Brake fluid delivery passage (brake caliper

body)

Blockage Blow out with compressed air.

WARNING

Replace the caliper piston seal and dust

seal whenever the brake caliper is disas-

sembled.

ÈFront

ÉRear

È

É

ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE

CALIPER

WARNING

All internal brake components should be

cleaned and lubricated with new brake

fluid only before installation.

Replace the caliper piston seal whenever

a brake caliper is disassembled.

1.Install:

Caliper piston seal 1

Dust seal 2

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

New

New

2.Install:

Brake caliper piston 1

4 — 36

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER

WARNING

All internal brake components should be

cleaned and lubricated with new brake

fluid only before installation.

Replace the caliper piston seal whenever

a brake caliper is disassembled.

1.Install:

O-ring 1

Caliper piston seal 2

Dust seal 3

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

New

New

New

2.Install:

Brake caliper piston 1

3.Install:

Lock washer 1

Brake pad holding bolts 2

4.Bend the lock washer tabs along a flat side

of the bolts.

New

T

R

.

.

18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • lb)

5.Mesh the bearing race tab 1 with parking

brake case slit.

4 — 37

CHAS

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER

1.Install:

Brake caliper assembly

Brake caliper mounting bolts 1

Brake hose 2

Copper washers 3

Union bolt 4

CAUTION:

When installing the brake hose on the

brake caliper, make sure that the brake

pipe touches the projection a on the brake

caliper.

WARNING

Proper brake hose routing is essential to

insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to

“CABLE ROUTING”.

2.Fill:

Brake reservoir

CAUTION:

Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces

or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled

brake fluid immediately.

WARNING

Use only the designated quality brake

fluid: Other brake fluids may deteriorate

the rubber seals, causing leakage and

poor brake performance.

Refill with the same type of brake fluid:

Mixing brake fluids may result in a harm-

ful chemical reaction and lead to poor

brake performance.

Be careful that water does not enter the

master cylinder when refilling. Water will

significantly lower the boiling point of the

brake fluid and may result in vapor lock.

3.Air bleed

Brake system

Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM” in CHAPTER 3.

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

T

R

.

.

28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)

New

T

R

.

.

27 Nm (2.7 m • kg, 19 ft • lb)

4 — 38

CHAS

4.Check:

Brake fluid level

Brake fluid level is below the “LOWER” level

line Add the recommended brake fluid to

the proper level.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL” in CHAPTER 3.

INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER

1.Install:

Brake caliper assembly

Brake caliper mounting bolts 1

Brake hose 2

Copper washers 3

Union bolt 4

CAUTION:

When installing the brake hose on the

brake caliper, make sure that the brake

pipe touches the projection a on the brake

caliper.

WARNING

Proper brake hose routing is essential to

insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to

“CABLE ROUTING”.

2.Fill:

Brake reservoir

CAUTION:

Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces

or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled

brake fluid immediately.

Recommended brake fluid:

DOT 4

T

R

.

.

28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)

New

T

R

.

.

30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

4 — 39

CHAS

WARNING

Use only the designated quality brake

fluid: Other brake fluids may deteriorate

the rubber seals, causing leakage and

poor brake performance.

Refill with the same type of brake fluid:

Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful

chemical reaction and lead to poor brake

performance.

Be careful that water does not enter the

master cylinder when refilling. Water will

significantly lower the boiling point of the

brake fluid and may result in vapor lock.

3.Air bleed

Brake system

Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC

BRAKE SYSTEM” in CHAPTER 3.

4.Check:

Brake fluid level

Brake fluid level is below the “LOWER” level

line Add the recommended brake fluid to

the proper level.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LEVEL” in CHAPTER 3.

5.Adjust:

Parking brake cable end length

Refer to “ADJUSTING THE PARKING

BRAKE” in CHAPTER 3.

FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

4 — 40

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

STEERING SYSTEM

HANDLEBAR

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the handlebar Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Handlebar cover 1

2Band 2

3 Front brake switch 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE FRONT

BRAKE SWITCH, PARK SWITCH AND

CLUTCH SWITCH”.

4 Brake master cylinder/bracket 1/1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE BRAKE

MASTER CYLINDER”.

5 Throttle lever assembly/bracket 1/1

6 Collar 1

7 Park switch 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE FRONT

BRAKE SWITCH, PARK SWITCH AND

CLUTCH SWITCH”.

8 Clutch switch 1

9 Clutch lever/bracket 1/1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH

LEVER”.

10 Handlebar switch 1

4 — 41

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

11 Handlebar grip 2 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

HANDLEBAR GRIP”.

12 Handlebar cover bracket 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE HANDLE-

BAR”.

13 Handlebar holder 2

14 Handlebar 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 42

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE SWITCH,

PARK SWITCH AND CLUTCH SWITCH

1.Remove:

Front brake switch 1

Park switch

Clutch switch

NOTE:

Push the fastener when removing the front

brake switch out of the brake master cylin-

der.

Push the fastener when removing the park

switch and clutch switch out of the clutch

lever holder.

REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR GRIP

1.Remove:

Handlebar grips 1

NOTE:

Blow compressed air between the handlebar

and handlebar grip, and gradually push the

grip off the handlebar.

CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR

1.Check:

Handlebar 1

Bends/cracks/damage Replace.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent handle-

bar as this may dangerously weaken the

handlebar.

4 — 43

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR

1.Install:

Handlebar

Handlebar holders

Handlebar cover brackets

NOTE:

The upper handlebar holder should be

installed with the punched mark 1 forward 2.

CAUTION:

First tighten the bolts 3 on the front side of

the handlebar holder, and then tighten the

bolts 4 on the rear side.

T

R

.

.

23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)

INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR GRIP

1.Install:

Handlebar grips 1

NOTE:

Before applying the adhesive, wipe off

grease or oil on the handlebar surface a

with a lacquer thinner.

Install the handlebar grips to the handlebar

so that the line b between the two arrow

marks faces straight upward.

INSTALLING THE CLUTCH LEVER

1.Install:

Handlebar switch 1

Clutch lever

Lever bracket 2

NOTE:

Install the lever bracket as shown.

a80 mm (3.1 in)

4 — 44

CHAS

INSTALLING THE BRAKE MASTER

CYLINDER

1.Install:

Throttle lever assembly

Collar

Brake master cylinder

NOTE:

Engage the indentations a in the collar with

the lobes b on the throttle lever assembly

and brake master cylinder.

The “UP” mark on the brake master cylinder

bracket should face up.

T

R

.

.

7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb)

STEERING SYSTEM

4 — 45

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

STEERING STEM

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the steering stem Remove the parts in the order below.

Front fender Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Fuel tank

Handlebar Refer to “HANDLEBAR”.

1 Pitman arm 1

2 Lock washer 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE LOCK

WASHER”.

3 Steering stem bushing 2

4 Collar 2

5 Oil seal 2

6 Steering stem 1

7 Oil seal 1

8 Oil seal 1

4 — 46

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

9 Bearing retainer 1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

BEARING RETAINER”.

10 Bearing 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 47

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

REMOVING THE BEARING RETAINER

1.Remove:

Bearing retainer (steering stem)

Damper rod holder:

P/N. YM-01327, 90890-01327

CHECKING THE STEERING STEM

1.Check:

Steering stem 1

Bends Replace.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent stem;

this may dangerously weaken the stem.

2.Check:

Oil seals 1

Steering stem bushings 2

Wear/damage Replace.

New

INSTALLING THE BEARING RETAINER

1.Install:

Bearing retainer (steering stem)

Damper rod holder:

P/N. YM-01327, 90890-01327

T

R

.

.

40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)

INSTALLING THE LOCK WASHER

1.Install:

Lock washer

2.Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of

the bolt.

New

T

R

.

.

23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • lb)

4 — 48

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

TIE-ROD AND STEERING KNUCKLE

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the tie-rod and steering

knuckle Remove the parts in the order below.

Front wheel/brake disc Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

1 Tie-rod 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE TIE-ROD”.

2 Pitman arm 1

3 Brake disc guard (inner) 1

4 Front bumper 1

5 Front arm (lower) 1

6 Front arm (upper) 1

7 Steering knuckle 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE STEERING

KNUCKLE”.

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 49

CHAS

STEERING SYSTEM

REMOVING THE STEERING KNUCKLE

1.Remove:

Steering knuckle 1

NOTE:

Use a general puller to separate the ball joint

2 and steering knuckle.

CHECKING THE TIE-ROD

1.Check:

Tie-rod free play and movement

Free play Replace the tie-rod end.

Turns roughly Replace the tie-rod end.

2.Check:

Tie-rod

Bends/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE STEERING KNUCKLE

1.Check:

Steering knuckle

Damage/pitting Replace.

INSTALLING THE TIE-ROD

1.Install:

Tie-rods (left and right)

NOTE:

The tie-rod which must be installed on the out

side has grooves 1.

T

R

.

.

25 Nm (2.5 m • kg, 18 ft • lb)

2.Adjust:

Toe-in

Refer to “ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN” in

CHAPTER 3.

4 — 50

CHAS

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the front arm and front

shock absorber Remove the parts in the order below.

Front wheel/brake disc Refer to “FRONT WHEELS”.

1 Front bumper 1

2 Brake disc guard (inner) 1

3Nut 1

4 Tie-rod 1 Disconnect.

5Nut 1

6Nut 1

7 Nut/bolt 1/1

8 Nut/bolt 2/2

Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

FRONT ARMS”.

9 Front arm (lower) 1

10 Nut/bolt 1/1

11 Front arm (upper) 1

4 — 51

CHAS

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

12 Nut/bolt 1/1

13 Front shock absorber/collar 1/1

14 Steering knuckle 1

15 Dust cover 6

16 Collar 1

17 Collar 2

18 Bushing 6

19 Circlip 1

20 Rubber boot 1

21 Ball joint 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 52

CHAS

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

REMOVING THE FRONT ARM

1.Check:

Front arm free play

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Check the front arm side play È by moving it

from side to side.

If side play is noticeable, check the bushings.

Check the front arm vertical movement É by

moving it up and down.

If the vertical movement is tight or rough, or if

there is binding, check the bushings.

***********************************************

2.Remove:

Front arms

CHECKING THE FRONT ARM

1.Check:

Front arms 1

Bends/damage Replace.

2.Check:

Bushings 2

Wear/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE FRONT SHOCK

ABSORBER

1.Check:

Shock absorber rod

Bends/damage Replace the shock

absorber assembly.

Shock absorber assembly

Oil leaks Replace the shock absorber

assembly.

Spring

Fatigue Replace the shock absorber

assembly.

Move the spring up and down.

4 — 53

CHAS

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

CHECKING THE BALL JOINT

1.Check:

Ball joint (front arm-upper)

Damage/pitting Replace the front arm

(upper).

Free play Replace the front arm.

Turns roughly Replace the front arm

(upper).

2.Check:

Ball joint (front arm-lower)

Damage/pitting Replace the ball joint.

Free play Replace the ball joint.

Turns roughly Replace the ball joint.

***********************************************

Ball joint replacement steps:

Clean the outside of the front lower arm.

Remove the circlip 1 and rubber boot 2.

Use the ball joint remover and installer set.

Install the body 3, long bolt 4, base 5 and

attachment 6 onto ball joint.

Hold the body 3 in place while turning in the

long bolt 4 to remove the ball joint 9 from

the front lower arm 0.

Remove the ball joint remover/installer.

Ball joint remover/installer set:

P/N. YM-01474, 90890-01474

Ball joint remover/installer attach-

ment set:

P/N. YM-01480, 90890-01480

3Body YM-01474

90890-01474

4Long bolt

5Base

YM-01480

90890-01480

6Remover attachment

7Installer spacer

8Installer washer

4 — 54

CHAS

Attach the assembled ball joint remover/

installer, new ball joint A, installer spacer 7

and installer washer 8 to the front lower arm

0.

NOTE:

Do not tap or damage the top of the ball joint.

Installer spacer 7 must be aligned with the

projection on the head of the ball joint A.

Remove the ball joint remover/installer.

Apply lithium-soap base grease to the new

ball joint A.

Install a new rubber boot and new circlip.

NOTE:

Always use a new ball joint set.

***********************************************

INSTALLING THE FRONT ARM

1.Install:

Front upper arm 1

Front lower arm 2

NOTE:

Be sure to position the bolts (upper and lower)

so that the bolt head faces outward.

T

R

.

.

38 Nm (3.8 m • kg, 27 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

32 Nm (3.2 m • kg, 23 ft • lb)

FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

4 — 55

CHAS

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the rear shock absorber

and relay arm Remove the parts in the order below.

Rear wheels and hub Refer to “REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE

AND HUB”.

1 Metal screw clamp 2

2 Self-locking nut/bolt 1/1 Refer to “REMOVING THE REAR

SHOCK ABSORBER”.

3 Self-locking nut/bolt 1/1

4 Self-locking nut/bolt 1/1

5 Self-locking nut/bolt 1/1

6 Rear shock absorber 1

7 Collar/oil seal 2/2

8 Collar/oil seal 2/2

4 — 56

CHAS

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

9 Self-locking nut/bolt 1/1

10 Relay arm 1

11 Spacer/oil seal/bushing 1/2/2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE RELAY ARM

AND CONNECTING ARM”.

12 Connecting arm 1

13 Dust cover 4

14 Spacer 1

15 Spacer 1

16 Bushing 4 Refer to “INSTALLING THE RELAY ARM

AND CONNECTING ARM”.

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 57

CHAS

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM

HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

AND GAS CYLINDER

WARNING

This rear shock absorber and gas cylinder

contain highly compressed nitrogen gas.

Before handling the rear shock absorber or

gas cylinder, read and make sure you

understand the following information. The

manufacturer cannot be held responsible

for property damage or personal injury that

may result from improper handling of the

rear shock absorber and gas cylinder.

Do not tamper or attempt to open the rear

shock absorber or gas cylinder.

Do not subject the rear shock absorber or

gas cylinder to an open flame or any

other source of high heat. High heat can

cause an explosion due to excessive gas

pressure.

Do not deform or damage the rear shock

absorber or gas cylinder in any way. If the

rear shock absorber, gas cylinder or both

are damaged, damping performance will

suffer.

DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK

ABSORBER AND GAS CYLINDER

Gas pressure must be released before dispos-

ing of a rear shock absorber and gas cylinder.

To release the gas pressure, press on the gas

valve needle with a suitable tool as shown,

until all of the gas is released (the hissing has

stopped).

WARNING

Wear eye protection to prevent eye damage

from released gas or metal chips.

4 — 58

CHAS

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM

REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

1.Remove:

Connecting arm-to-frame bolt

Rear shock absorber upper bolt

NOTE:

While removing the connecting arm-to-frame

bolt, hold the swingarm so that it does not drop

down.

CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

1.Check:

Shock absorber

Oil leaks Replace the rear shock absorber

assembly.

Shock absorber rod

Bends/damage Replace the rear shock

absorber assembly.

Spring

Fatigue Replace the rear shock absorber

assembly.

Move the spring up and down.

Gas cylinder

Damage/gas leaks Replace the rear

shock absorber assembly.

CHECKING THE RELAY ARM AND

CONNECTING ARM

1.Check:

Relay arm

Connecting arm

Damage/wear Replace.

Bushings

Spacers

Oil seals

Damage/pitting/scratches Replace.

4 — 59

CHAS

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND RELAY ARM

INSTALLING THE RELAY ARM AND

CONNECTING ARM

1.Install:

Bushing 1

(to connecting arm)

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the

bushing when installing.

Installed depth of bushing a:

1 mm (0.04 in)

2.Install:

Bushing 1

Oil seal 2

(to relay arm)

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the

bushing when installing.

Installed depth of bushing a:

6.5 mm (0.26 in)

New

INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK

ABSORBER

1.Install:

Connecting arm

Relay arm

Rear shock absorber

NOTE:

When installing the rear shock absorber, lift up

the swingarm.

4 — 60

CHAS

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the swingarm and drive

chain Remove the parts in the order below.

Rear wheels and hub Refer to “REAR WHEELS, WHEEL AXLE

AND HUB”.

Rear shock absorber Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

AND RELAY ARM”.

Left footrest and left footrest guard

bracket Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” in CHAP-

TER 5.

1 Adjusting bolt/nut 2/2

2 Swingarm skid plate 1

3 Drive chain guide 1

4 Pivot shaft nut/washer 1/1

5 Pivot shaft 1

6 Swingarm 1 Refer to “REMOVING THE SWINGARM”.

7 Drive sprocket cover 1

4 — 61

CHAS

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

8Nut 1

Refer to “INSTALLING THE DRIVE

SPROCKET”.

9 Lock washer 1

10 Drive sprocket 1

11 Drive chain 1

12 Collar 1

13 Spacer 1

14 Oil seal 1

15 Bearing 1

16 Dust cover/oil seal/washer 1/1/1

17 Spacer 1

18 Oil seal 2

19 Bushing 2 Refer to “INSTALLING THE SWING-

ARM”.

20 Bearing 2

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

4 — 62

CHAS

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

NOTE:

Before removing the drive chain and the

sprockets, measure the drive chain slack and

a ten link section of the drive chain.

REMOVING THE SWINGARM

1.Check:

Swingarm free play

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Check the tightening torque of the pivot shaft

nut.

Check the swingarm side play È by moving

it from side to side.

If side play is noticeable, check the collar,

spacers, bearings, bushings and frame pivot.

Check the swingarm vertical movement É

by moving it up and down.

If vertical movement is tight or rough, or if

there is binding, check the collar, spacers,

bearings, bushings and frame pivot.

***********************************************

2.Remove:

Pivot shaft nut

Pivot shaft

Swingarm

T

R

.

.

Pivot shaft nut:

95 Nm (9.5 m • kg, 68 ft • lb)

CHECKING THE SWINGARM

1.Check:

Swingarm

Bends/cracks/damage Replace.

4 — 63

CHAS

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

2.Check:

Pivot shaft

Roll the axle on a flat surface.

Bends Replace.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent pivot

shaft.

3.Clean:

Pivot shaft

Collar

Spacers

Bearings

Bushings

4.Check:

Spacers

Oil seals

Damage/wear Replace.

Bearings

Bushings

Damage/pitting Replace.

Recommended cleaning solvent:

Kerosine

CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN

1.Measure:

Ten-link section a of the drive chain

Out of specification Replace the drive

chain.

NOTE:

While measuring the ten-link section, push

down on the drive chain to increase its ten-

sion.

Measure the length between drive chain

roller 1 and A as shown.

Perform this measurement at two or three

different places.

Max. ten-link drive chain section:

150.1 mm (5.91 in)

4 — 64

CHAS

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

2.Check:

Drive chain

Stiffness Clean and lubricate or replace.

3.Clean:

Drive chain

***********************************************

Wipe the drive chain with a clean cloth.

Put the drive chain in kerosine and remove

any remaining dirt.

Remove the drive chain from the kerosine

and completely dry it.

CAUTION:

This machine has a drive chain with small

rubber O-rings 1 between the drive chain

side plates. Never use high-pressure water

or air, steam, gasoline, certain solvents

(e.g., benzine), or a coarse brush to clean

the drive chain. High-pressure methods

could force dirt or water into the drive

chain’s internals, and solvents will deterio-

rate the O-rings. A coarse brush can also

damage the O-rings. Therefore, use only

kerosine to clean the drive chain.

***********************************************

4.Check:

O-rings 1

Damage Replace the drive chain.

Drive chain rollers 2

Damage/wear Replace the drive chain.

Drive chain side plates 3

Cracks/damage/wear Replace the drive

chain.

4 — 65

CHAS

SWINGARM AND DRIVE CHAIN

5.Lubricate:

Drive chain

Recommended lubricant:

Engine oil or chain lubricant

suitable for O-ring chains

6.Check:

Drive sprocket

Driven sprocket

More than 1/4 tooth a wear Replace the

drive chain sprockets as a set.

Bent teeth Replace the drive chain

sprockets as a set.

bCorrect

1Drive chain roller

2Drive chain sprocket

INSTALLING THE SWINGARM

1.Install:

Bearings 1

Bushings 2

(to swingarm)

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the

bearing and bushing when installing.

Installed depth of bearing:

Left a: 0 mm (0 in)

Right b: 4 mm (0.16 in)

Installed depth of bushing c:

8 mm (0.31 in)

INSTALLING THE DRIVE SPROCKET

1.Install:

Drive sprocket 1

Lock washer 2

Nut 3

2.Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of

the nut.

New

T

R

.

.

70 Nm (7.0 m • kg, 50 ft • lb)

5 — 1

ENG

ENGINE REMOVAL

ENGINE

ENGINE REMOVAL

MUFFLER AND EXHAUST PIPES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the muffler and exhaust

pipes

Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat/left footrest guard/engine

Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Skid plate

Front and rear fenders

Fuel tank and rubber covers

1 Muffler 1

2 Exhaust pipe 1 1

3 Exhaust pipe 2 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 2

ENG

ENGINE REMOVAL

LEFT FOOTREST

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the left footrest Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Locknut 1

2 Locknut 1 Left-hand threads

3 Adjusting rod 1

4 Left footrest guard bracket 1

5 Left footrest 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 3

ENG

ENGINE REMOVAL

LEADS, CABLES AND HOSES

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the leads, cables and

hoses

Remove the parts in the order below.

Engine oil Drain.

Coolant Drain.

Water jacket outlet pipe Refer to “THERMOSTAT” in CHAPTER 6.

Radiator outlet hose Refer to “WATER PUMP” in CHAPTER 6.

Carburetors Refer to “CARBURETORS” in CHAPTER

7.

Rear shock absorber and connecting

arm

Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

AND RELAY ARM” in CHAPTER 4.

Drive sprocket and swingarm Refer to “SWINGARM AND DRIVE

CHAIN” in CHAPTER 4.

1 Spark plug cap 1

2 Starter motor lead 1

3 Band 1

5 — 4

ENG

ENGINE REMOVAL

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

4 Coupler 5 Disconnect.

5 Speed sensor/O-ring 1/1

6 Neutral switch lead/reverse switch lead 1/1

7 Ground lead 1

8 Clutch cable 1

9 Parking brake cable 1

10 Reverse control cable 1

11 Oil pipe 2 1 Disconnect.

12 Oil pipe 1 1 Disconnect.

13 Oil tank breather hose 1 Disconnect.

14 Crankcase breather hose 1 Disconnect.

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 5

ENG

ENGINE REMOVAL

ENGINE MOUNTING BOLTS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the engine mounting bolt Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Engine mounting bolt (upper)/nut 1/1

2 Engine bracket bolt (upper) 4

CAUTION:

Install all of the bolts/nuts and then

tighten them to full torque specifica-

tions.

Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE”.

3 Engine bracket (upper) 1

4 Engine mounting bolt (middle)/nut 1/1

5 Engine mounting bolt (lower)/nut 1/1

6 Engine bracket (middle-left) 1

7 Engine bracket (middle-right) 1

8 Engine bracket bolt (lower) 4

9 Engine bracket (lower-left) 1

10 Engine bracket (lower-right) 1

5 — 6

ENG

ENGINE REMOVAL

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

11 Engine assembly 1 NOTE:

Remove the engine assembly from the

left side of the machine.

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 7

ENG

INSTALLING THE ENGINE

1.Install:

Engine brackets (lower) 1

Engine bracket bolts (lower) 2

Engine brackets (middle) 3

Engine mounting bolt (lower)/nut 4

Engine mounting bolt (middle)/nut 5

Engine bracket (upper) 6

Engine bracket bolts (upper) 7

Engine mounting bolt (upper)/nut 8

NOTE:

Do not fully tighten the bolts and nuts.

2.Install:

Swingarm

Pivot shaft/nut 9

NOTE:

Do not fully tighten the pivot shaft nut.

3.Tighten:

Engine bracket bolt (lower) 2

Engine bracket bolt (upper) 7

Engine mounting bolt (lower)/nut 4

Engine mounting bolt (middle)/nut 5

Engine mounting bolt (upper)/nut 8

Pivot shaft/nut 9

T

R

.

.

56 Nm (5.6 m • kg, 40 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

33 Nm (3.3 m • kg, 24 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

56 Nm (5.6 m • kg, 40 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

56 Nm (5.6 m • kg, 40 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

95 Nm (9.5 m • kg, 68 ft • lb)

ENGINE REMOVAL

5 — 8

ENG

CYLINDER HEAD COVER

CYLINDER HEAD COVER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the cylinder head cover Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat/front fender Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Fuel tank/rubber cover 2

1 Engine mounting bolt/nut 1/1

2 Engine bracket (front-upper) 1

3 Oil tank breather hose 1

4 Union bolt 2

5 Copper washer 4

6 Oil delivery pipe 1 1

7 Spark plug 1

8 Tappet cover (intake) 1

9 Tappet cover (exhaust) 2

5 — 9

ENG

CYLINDER HEAD COVER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

10 Cylinder head cover 1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING CYL-

INDER HEAD COVER”.

11 Dowel pin 2

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 10

ENG

CYLINDER HEAD COVER

REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVER

1.Align:

“I” mark

(with stationary pointer)

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise with a

wrench.

Align the “I” mark 1 on the rotor with the sta-

tionary pointer 2 on the crankcase cover.

When the “I” mark is aligned with the station-

ary pointer, the piston is at the Top Dead

Center (T.D.C.).

NOTE:

When the piston is at the top dead center

(T.D.C.) on the compression stroke, there

should be clearance between the valve stem

tips and their respective rocker arm adjusting

screws.

If there is no clearance, rotate the crankshaft

counterclockwise one turn.

***********************************************

2.Remove:

Cylinder head cover

NOTE:

Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in

stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all the

bolts are loosened, remove them.

CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVER

1.Check:

Cylinder head cover

Cracks/damage Replace the cylinder

head cover and cylinder head as a set.

5 — 11

ENG

CYLINDER HEAD COVER

CHECKING THE TAPPET COVER

1.Check:

Tappet cover (intake) 1

Tappet cover (exhaust) 2

O-ring 3 New

INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD COVER

1.Apply:

Sealant (Quick Gasket) 1

(to the mating surfaces of the cylinder head

and cylinder head cover)

2.Install:

Cylinder head cover

Cable guides 1

Washers 2

Bolts

3Bolt: = 25 mm

4Bolt: = 40 mm

5Bolt: = 55 mm

6Bolt: = 115 mm

7Bolt: = 130 mm

NOTE:

Tighten the cylinder head cover bolts in

stages, using a crisscross pattern.

Sealant (Quick Gasket) 1:

P/N. ACC-11001-05-01

Yamaha bond No. 1215:

P/N. 90890-85505

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

5 — 12

ENG

ROCKER ARMS

ROCKER ARMS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the rocker arm Remove the parts in the order below.

Cylinder head cover Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD COVER”.

1 Plug/O-ring 1/1

2Bolt 2

3 Rocker arm shaft 2/O-ring 1/1

Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

ROCKER ARM”.

4 Rocker arm 3 1

5 Rocker arm shaft 3/O-ring 1/1

6 Rocker arm 4 1

7 Rocker arm shaft 1/O-ring 1/1

8 Rocker arm 1 1

9 Rocker arm 2 1

5 — 13

ENG

ROCKER ARMS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

10 Spring 4

11 Locknut 5

12 Valve adjuster 5

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 14

ENG

ROCKER ARMS

REMOVING THE ROCKER ARM

1.Remove:

Rocker arm shafts 1

Rocker arms 2

NOTE:

Use a slide hammer bolt 3 and weight 4 to

remove the rocker arm shafts.

Slide hammer set:

P/N. YU-01083-A

Slide hammer bolt (M6):

P/N. 90890-01083

Weight:

P/N. 90890-01084

CHECKING THE ROCKER ARM

1.Check:

Rocker arm lobes 1

Valve adjusters 2

Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches

Replace.

2.Check:

Rocker arms

Rocker arm shafts

Damage/wear Replace.

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Check the two contact areas on the rocker

arms for signs of abnormal wear.

1) Rocker arm shaft hole.

2) Camshaft lobe contact surface.

Excessive wear Replace.

Check the surface of the rocker arm shafts.

Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches

Replace/check lubrication.

Measure the inside diameter a of the rocker

arm holes.

Out of specification Replace.

Rocker arm inside diameter:

12.000 ~ 12.018 mm

(0.4724 ~ 0.4731 in)

5 — 15

ENG

ROCKER ARMS

Measure the outside diameter b of the

rocker arm shafts.

Out of specification Replace.

Calculate the clearance by subtracting the

rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the

rocker arm inside diameter.

Clearance greater than 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

Replace the defective part(s).

***********************************************

Rocker arm outside diameter:

11.976 ~ 11.991 mm

(0.4715 ~ 0.4721 in)

Rocker arm to shaft standard

clearance:

0.009 ~ 0.042 mm

(0.0004 ~ 0.0017 in)

INSTALLING THE ROCKER ARM

1.Apply:

Engine oil

(onto the rocker arm shafts)

2.Install:

Rocker arms 1

Rocker arm shafts 2

NOTE:

The thread hole a of the rocker arm shaft

must face to the outside.

After installation, make sure that the thread

hole a of the rocker arm shaft is positioned

correctly, as shown in the illustration.

5 — 16

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the camshaft and cylin-

der head

Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat/front fender Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Fuel tank/rubber covers

Carburetors Refer to “CARBURETORS” in CHAPTER

7.

Water jacket outlet pipe Refer to “THERMOSTAT” in CHAPTER 6.

Muffler/exhaust pipe Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.

Cylinder head cover Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD COVER”.

1 Timing chain tensioner cap bolt 1

Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD”.

2 Timing chain tensioner/gasket 1/1

3 Timing chain guide (exhaust) 1

4 Decompressor cam guide plate 2

5 Camshaft sprocket 1

5 — 17

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

6 Camshaft 1 Refer to “CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER

HEAD”.

7 Cylinder head 1

8 Cylinder head gasket 1

9 Dowel pin 2

10 Carburetor joint 1 1

11 Carburetor joint 2 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 18

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

REMOVING THE CAMSHAFT AND CYLIN-

DER HEAD

1.Loosen:

Camshaft sprocket bolts 1

2.Loosen:

Timing chain tensioner cap bolt

3.Remove:

Timing chain tensioner

Timing chain guide (exhaust)

Decompressor cam guide plates

Camshaft sprocket

NOTE:

Fasten a safety wire to the timing chain to

prevent it from falling into the crankcase.

When removing the camshaft sprocket, it is

not necessary to separate the timing chain.

4.Remove:

Cylinder head

NOTE:

Loosen the bolts in the proper sequence.

Follow the numerical order shown in the illus-

tration. Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a

time until all of the bolts are loose.

5 — 19

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT

1.Check:

Cam lobes

Pitting/scratches/blue discoloration

Replace.

2.Measure:

Cam lobes length a and b.

Out of specification Replace.

Camshaft lobe limit:

Intake:

a 35.59 mm (1.4012 in)

b 30.05 mm (1.1831 in)

Exhaust:

a 36.40 mm (1.4331 in)

b 30.05 mm (1.1831 in)

CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

1.Check:

Camshaft sprocket

Wear/damage Replace the camshaft

sprocket and timing chain as a set.

a1/4 of a tooth

bCorrect

1Timing chain

2Sprocket

CHECKING THE DECOMPRESSION SYS-

TEM

1.Check:

Decompression system

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Check while the camshaft sprocket is installed

on the camshaft.

Check that the decompressor lever pin 1

projects from the camshaft.

Check that the decompressor cam 2 moves

smoothly.

***********************************************

5 — 20

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN GUIDE

1.Check:

Exhaust side timing chain guide

Wear/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TEN-

SIONER

1.Check:

One-way cam operation (tensioner)

Unsmooth operation Replace.

CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD

1.Eliminate:

Carbon deposits (from the combustion

chambers)

Use a rounded scraper.

NOTE:

Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damag-

ing or scratching:

Spark plug threads

Valve seats

2.Check:

Cylinder head

Scratches/damage Replace the cylinder

head cover and cylinder head as a set.

Cylinder head water jacket

Mineral deposits/rust Eliminate.

5 — 21

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

3.Measure:

Cylinder head warpage

Out of specification Resurface.

***********************************************

Warpage measurement and resurfacing

steps:

Place a straightedge and a feeler gauge

across the cylinder head.

Use a feeler gauge to measure the warpage.

If the warpage is out of specification, resur-

face the cylinder head.

Place a 400 ~ 600 grit wet sandpaper on the

surface plate, and resurface the head using

a figure-eight sanding pattern.

NOTE:

To ensure an even surface rotate the cylinder

head several times.

***********************************************

Cylinder head warpage:

Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND CYLIN-

DER HEAD

1.Install:

Cylinder head

Bolts (M9 : 1 ~ 6)

Bolt (M6 : 7)

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in the proper sequence.

Follow the numerical order shown in the illus-

tration. Tighten the bolts in two stages.

T

R

.

.

38 Nm (3.8 m · kg, 27 ft · lb)

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

5 — 22

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

2.Install:

Camshaft

Camshaft sprocket

***********************************************

Installation steps:

Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise with a

wrench.

Align the “I” mark 1 on the rotor with the sta-

tionary pointer 2 on the crankcase cover.

When the “I” mark is aligned with the station-

ary pointer, the piston is at the Top Dead

Center (T.D.C.).

CAUTION:

Do not turn the crankshaft during the cam-

shaft installation.

Temporarily install the camshaft sprocket on

the camshaft. (Do not install the bolts.) Then,

install the timing chain on the camshaft

sprocket.

NOTE:

Make sure the small holes 3 on the camshaft

face upward.

Align the notches 4 on the decompressor

cams with the projections 5 on the decom-

pressor spring lever, then install the cam-

shaft sprocket on the camshaft.

NOTE:

Check that each part is positioned as shown in

the illustration.

6Small holes on camshaft sprocket

7Punch mark on decompressor spring lever

8Top front of cylinder head

5 — 23

ENG

CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER HEAD

Install the decompressor cam guide plates 9

and camshaft sprocket bolts 0.

Remove the retaining wire.

***********************************************

T

R

.

.

Camshaft sprocket bolt:

20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 14 ft • lb)

3.Install:

Timing chain tensioner

***********************************************

Installation steps:

Remove the timing chain tensioner cap bolt

1, washer 2 and spring 3.

Release the timing chain tensioner one-way

cam 4 and push the tensioner rod 5 all the

way in.

Install the tensioner 6 with a new gasket into

the cylinder.

WARNING

Always use a new gasket.

Install the spring, washer and timing chain

tensioner cap bolt.

***********************************************

4.Check:

Small holes on camshaft sprocket

Rotor “I” mark

Out of alignment Adjust.

T

R

.

.

Bolts (timing chain tensioner):

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

Timing chain tensioner cap bolt:

22 Nm (2.2 m • kg, 16 ft • lb)

5 — 24

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the valve and valve

spring

Remove the parts in the order below.

Cylinder head Refer to “CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER

HEAD”.

1 Valve cotter 10

Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

VALVE AND VALVE SPRING”.

2 Valve spring retainer 5

3 Intake valve spring 3

4 Exhaust valve spring 2

5 Intake valve 3

6 Exhaust valve 2

7 Valve stem seal 5

8 Valve spring seat 5

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 25

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

REMOVING THE VALVE AND VALVE

SPRING

1.Check:

Valve sealing

Leakage at the valve seat Inspect the

valve face, valve seat and valve seat width.

Refer to “VALVE AND VALVE SPRING

INSPECTION”.

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Pour a clean solvent 1 into the intake and

exhaust ports.

Check that the valve seals properly.

There should be no leakage at the valve seat

2.

***********************************************

2.Remove:

Valve cotters

NOTE:

Attach a valve spring compressor 1 and

attachment 2 between the valve spring

retainer and the cylinder head to remove the

valve cotters.

Valve spring compressor:

P/N. YM-04019, 90890-04019

Valve spring compressor

attachment:

P/N. 90890-01243

5 — 26

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

CHECKING THE VALVE AND VALVE

SPRING

1.Measure:

Stem-to-guide clearance

Out of specification Replace the valve

guide.

Stem-to-guide clearance =

valve guide inside diameter a

valve stem diameter b

Clearance (stem to guide):

Intake:

0.010 ~ 0.037 mm

(0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in)

<Limit>: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

Exhaust:

0.025 ~ 0.052 mm

(0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in)

<Limit>: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)

2.Replace:

Valve guide

***********************************************

Replacement steps:

NOTE:

To ease guide removal, installation and to

maintain correct fit, heat the cylinder head to

100 °C (212 °F) in an oven.

Remove the valve guide using a valve guide

remover 1.

Install the new valve guide using a valve

guide remover 1 and valve guide installer

2.

After installing the valve guide, bore the

valve guide using a valve guide reamer 3 to

obtain proper stem-to-guide clearance.

NOTE:

After replacing the valve guide reface the valve

seat.

***********************************************

Valve guide remover (ø 6):

P/N. YM-4064-A, 90890-04064

Valve guide installer (ø 6):

P/N. YM-04065-A, 90890-04065

Valve guide reamer (ø 6):

P/N. YM-04066, 90890-04066

5 — 27

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

3.Check:

Valve face

Pitting/wear Grind the face.

Valve stem end

Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the

body of the stem Replace.

4.Measure:

Margin thickness a

Out of specification Replace.

Margin thickness:

Intake:

0.85 ~ 1.15 mm

(0.0335 ~ 0.0453 in)

Exhaust:

0.85 ~ 1.15 mm

(0.0335 ~ 0.0453 in)

5.Measure:

Runout (valve stem)

Out of specification Replace.

NOTE:

When installing a new valve always replace

the guide.

If the valve is removed or replaced always

replace the oil seal.

6.Eliminate:

Carbon deposits

(from the valve face and valve seat)

7.Check:

Valve seats

Pitting/wear Reface the valve seat.

Runout limit:

0.01 mm (0.0004 in)

5 — 28

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

8.Measure:

Valve seat width a

Out of specification Reface the valve seat.

***********************************************

Measurement steps:

Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b to

the valve face.

Install the valve into the cylinder head.

Press the valve through the valve guide and

onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.

Measure the valve seat width. Where the

valve seat and valve face made contact,

blueing will have been removed.

If the valve seat is too wide, too narrow, or

the seat is not centered, the valve seat must

be refaced.

***********************************************

Valve seat width:

Intake:

0.9 ~ 1.1 mm

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)

<Limit>: 1.6 mm (0.0630 in)

Exhaust:

0.9 ~ 1.1 mm

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)

<Limit>: 1.6 mm (0.0630 in)

9.Lap:

Valve face

Valve seat

NOTE:

After refacing the valve seat or replacing the

valve and valve guide, the valve seat and

valve face should be lapped.

***********************************************

Lapping steps:

Apply a coarse lapping compound to the

valve face.

CAUTION:

Do not let the compound enter the gap

between the valve stem and the guide.

Apply molybdenum disulfide oil to the valve

stem.

5 — 29

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

Install the valve into the cylinder head.

Turn the valve until the valve face and valve

seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of

the compound.

NOTE:

For best lapping results, lightly tap the valve

seat while rotating the valve back and forth

between your hands.

Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve

face and repeat the above steps.

NOTE:

After every lapping operation be sure to clean

off all of the compound from the valve face and

valve seat.

Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) to the

valve face.

Install the valve into the cylinder head.

Press the valve through the valve guide and

onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.

Measure the valve seat width again. If the

valve seat width is out of specification, reface

and relap the valve seat.

***********************************************

10.Measure:

Valve spring free length a

Out of specification Replace.

Free length (valve spring):

Inner:

35.95 mm (1.42 in)

<Limit>: 34.15 mm (1.34 in)

Outer:

37.75 mm (1.49 in)

<Limit>: 35.86 mm (1.41 in)

5 — 30

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

11.Measure:

Compressed spring force a

Out of specification Replace.

bInstalled length

Compressed spring force:

Inner:

149 ~ 173 N at 27.2 mm

(15.19 ~ 17.64 kg,

33.50 ~ 38.89 lb at 1.07 in)

Outer:

165 ~ 191 N at 30.7 mm

(16.83 ~ 19.49 kg,

37.09 ~ 42.94 lb at 1.21 in)

12.Measure:

Spring tilt a

Out of specification Replace.

Spring tilt limit:

Inner:

2.5°/1.6 mm (0.06 in)

Outer:

2.5°/1.6 mm (0.06 in)

INSTALLING THE VALVE AND VALVE

SPRING

1.Apply:

Molybdenum disulfide oil

(onto the valve stem and valve stem seal)

2.Install:

Valve spring seats

Valve stem seals

Valves

Valve springs

Valve spring retainers

NOTE:

Install the valve springs with the larger pitch a

facing upwards.

bSmaller pitch

New

5 — 31

ENG

VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

3.Install:

Valve cotters

NOTE:

Install the valve cotters while compressing the

valve spring with the valve spring compressor

1 and attachment 2.

Valve spring compressor:

P/N. YM-04019, 90890-04019

Valve spring compressor

attachment:

P/N. 90890-01243

4.To secure the valve cotters onto the valve

stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a piece of

wood.

CAUTION:

Hitting the valve tip with excessive force

could damage the valve.

5 — 32

ENG

CYLINDER AND PISTON

CYLINDER AND PISTON

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the cylinder and piston Remove the parts in the order below.

Water jacket inlet housing Refer to “WATER PUMP” in CHAPTER 6.

Cylinder head Refer to “CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER

HEAD”.

1 Cable guide 1

2 Cylinder/O-ring 1/1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER”.

3 Cylinder gasket 1

4 Dowel pin 2

5 Piston pin clip 2

Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

PISTON”.

6 Piston pin 1

7 Piston 1

8 Piston ring set 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 33

ENG

CYLINDER AND PISTON

REMOVING THE PISTON

1.Remove:

Piston pin clips 1

Piston pin 2

Piston 3

NOTE:

Put identification marks on each piston head

for reference during reinstallation.

Before removing each piston pin, deburr the

clip groove and pin hole area. If the piston

pin groove is deburred and the piston pin is

still difficult to remove, use the piston pin

puller 4.

CAUTION:

Do not use a hammer to drive the piston

pin out.

2.Remove:

Piston rings

NOTE:

Spread the end gaps apart while at the same

time lifting the piston ring over the top of the

piston crown, as shown in the illustration.

Piston pin puller:

P/N. YU-01304, 90890-01304

CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON

1.Check:

Cylinder and piston walls

Vertical scratches Rebore or replace the

cylinder and the piston.

2.Measure:

Piston-to-cylinder clearance

***********************************************

Measurement steps:

1st step:

Measure the cylinder bore “C” with a cylinder

bore gauge 1.

a50 mm (2.0 in) from the top of the cylinder

5 — 34

ENG

CYLINDER AND PISTON

NOTE:

Measure cylinder bore “C” in parallel to and at

right angles to the cylinder matching surface.

Then, find the average of the measurements.

If out of specification, rebore or replace the

cylinder, and replace the piston and piston

rings as a set.

2nd step:

Measure piston skirt diameter “P” with a

micrometer.

b5.0 mm (0.20 in) from the piston bottom edge

If out of specification, replace the piston and

piston rings as a set.

3rd step:

Find the piston-to-cylinder clearance with the

following formula.

If out of specification, rebore or replace the

cylinder, and replace the piston and piston

rings as a set.

***********************************************

Standard Wear limit

Cylinder

bore “C”

100.005 ~

100.045 mm

(3.9372 ~ 3.9388 in)

100.100 mm

(3.9404 in)

C =

Piston skirt diameter “P”:

Standard 99.945 ~ 99.995 mm

(3.9348 ~ 3.9368 in)

Piston-to-cylinder clearance =

Cylinder bore “C” –

Piston skirt diameter “P”

Piston-to-cylinder clearance:

0.05 ~ 0.07 mm

(0.0020 ~ 0.0028 in)

<Limit>: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

X+Y

2

5 — 35

ENG

CYLINDER AND PISTON

CHECKING THE PISTON RING

1.Measure:

Ring side clearance

Use a feeler gauge.

Out of specification Replace the piston

and rings as a set.

NOTE:

Clean carbon from the piston ring grooves and

rings before measuring the side clearance.

Side clearance

Standard Limit

Top

ring 0.04 ~ 0.08 mm

(0.0016 ~ 0.0031 in) 0.13 mm

(0.0051 in)

2nd

ring 0.03 ~ 0.07 mm

(0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) 0.13 mm

(0.0051 in)

2.Position:

Piston ring

(in cylinder)

NOTE:

Insert a ring into the cylinder and push it

approximately 50 mm (2.0 in) into the cylinder.

Push the ring with the piston crown so that the

ring will be at a right angle to the cylinder bore.

a50 mm (2.0 in)

3.Measure:

Ring end gap

Out of specification Replace.

NOTE:

You cannot measure the end gap on the

expander spacer of the oil control ring. If the oil

control ring rails show excessive gap, replace

all three rings.

End gap

Standard Limit

Top

ring 0.30 ~ 0.45 mm

(0.0118 ~ 0.0177 in) 0.70 mm

(0.0276 in)

2nd

ring 0.30 ~ 0.45 mm

(0.0118 ~ 0.0177 in) 0.80 mm

(0.0315 in)

Oil

ring 0.2 ~ 0.7 mm

(0.0079 ~ 0.0276 in)

5 — 36

ENG

CYLINDER AND PISTON

CHECKING THE PISTON PIN INSPECTION

1.Check:

Piston pin

Blue discoloration/grooves Replace, then

inspect the lubrication system.

2.Measure:

Piston pin-to-piston clearance

***********************************************

Measurement steps:

Measure the piston pin outside diameter a.

If out of specification, replace the piston pin.

Measure the piston inside diameter b.

Calculate the piston pin-to-piston clearance

with the following formula.

If out of specification, replace the piston.

***********************************************

INSTALLING THE PISTON

1.Install:

Piston rings

(onto the piston)

NOTE:

Be sure to install the piston rings so that the

manufacturer’s marks or numbers are

located on the upper side of the rings.

Lubricate the piston and piston rings liberally

with engine oil.

Outside diameter (piston pin):

21.991 ~ 22.000 mm

(0.8658 ~ 0.8661 in)

Piston pin bore inside diameter:

22.004 ~ 22.015 mm

(0.8663 ~ 0.8667 in)

Piston pin-to-piston clearance =

Bore size (piston pin) b

Outside diameter (piston pin) a

Piston pin-to-piston clearance:

0.004 ~ 0.024 mm

(0.00016 ~ 0.00094 in)

<Limit>: 0.07 mm (0.003 in)

5 — 37

ENG

CYLINDER AND PISTON

2.Position:

Top ring

2nd ring

Oil ring

Offset the piston ring end gaps as shown.

aTop ring end

bOil ring end (lower)

cOil ring end (upper)

d2nd ring end

3.Install:

Piston 1

Piston pin 2

Piston pin clips 3

NOTE:

Apply engine oil onto the piston pin, piston

ring and piston.

Be sure that the arrow mark a on the piston

points to the exhaust side of the engine.

Before installing the piston pin clip, cover the

crankcase with a clean rag to prevent the

piston pin clip from falling into the crankcase.

4.Lubricate:

Piston

Piston rings

Cylinder

NOTE:

Apply a liberal coating of engine oil.

New

INSTALLING THE CYLINDER

1.Install:

Cylinder

O-ring

Bolts (M10)

Bolts (M6)

NOTE:

Install the cylinder with one hand while com-

pressing the piston rings with the other hand.

CAUTION:

Be careful not to damage the timing chain

damper during installation.

Pass the timing chain through the timing

chain cavity.

New

T

R

.

.

42 Nm (4.2 m · kg, 30 ft · lb)

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

5 — 38

ENG

AC MAGNETO

AC MAGNETO

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the AC magneto Remove the parts in the order below.

Engine oil Drain.

Shift pedal link Disconnect.

1 Oil pipe 1 1 Disconnect.

2 AC magneto coupler 2

3 Starter idle gear cover/gasket 1/1

4 Dowel pin 1

5 Starter idle gear 1 1

6 Starter idle gear 1 shaft 1

7 Bearing 1

8 AC magneto cover/gasket 1/1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

AC MAGNETO ROTOR”.

5 — 39

ENG

AC MAGNETO

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

9 Dowel pin/O-ring 3/2

10 Lead holder 1

11 Pickup coil 1

12 Stator assembly 1

13 Starter idle gear 2 1

14 Starter idle gear 2 shaft 1

15 Bearing 1

16 AC magneto rotor 1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

AC MAGNETO ROTOR”.

17 Starter wheel gear 1

18 Woodruff key 1

19 Bearing/washer 1/1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 40

ENG

AC MAGNETO

REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR

1.Remove:

AC magneto cover

NOTE:

Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in

stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of

the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.

2.Remove:

AC magneto rotor nut 1

Washer

NOTE:

While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with

the sheave holder 3, loosen the generator

rotor nut.

Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the

projection 4 on the rotor.

Sheave holder:

P/N. YS-01880, 90890-01701

3.Remove:

AC magneto rotor 1

NOTE:

Use the flywheel puller 2.

Flywheel puller:

P/N. YU-33270, 90890-01362

CHECKING THE COIL

1.Check:

Stator assembly

Pickup coil

Damage Replace.

5 — 41

ENG

AC MAGNETO

CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH

1.Check:

Starter one-way clutch 1

Cracks/damage Replace.

Bolts 2 (starter clutch)

Loose Replace.

NOTE:

The arrow mark on the starter clutch must face

inward, away from the AC magneto rotor.

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Install the starter wheel gear to the starter

clutch, and hold the starter clutch.

When turning the starter wheel gear counter

clockwise È, the starter clutch and the wheel

gear should be engaged.

If not, the starter clutch is faulty. Replace it.

When turning the starter wheel gear clock-

wise É, the starter wheel gear should turn

freely.

If not, the starter clutch is faulty. Replace it.

***********************************************

T

R

.

.

Bolts (starter clutch):

16 Nm (1.6 m • kg, 11 ft • lb)

LOCTITE®

2.Check:

Gear teeth (starter idle) 1

Gear teeth (starter wheel) 2

Burrs/chips/roughness/wear Replace.

3.Check:

Starter wheel gear

(contacting surface)

Damage/pitting/wear Replace.

5 — 42

ENG

AC MAGNETO

INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR

1.Apply:

Sealant (Quick Gasket®) 1

(into the slit)

Sealant (Quick Gasket®):

P/N. ACC-11001-05-01

Yamaha bond No. 1215®:

P/N. 90890-85505

2.Install:

Woodruff key

AC magneto rotor

NOTE:

Before installing the rotor, clean the outside

of the crankshaft and the inside of the rotor.

After installing the rotor, check that the rotor

rotates smoothly. If not, reinstall the key and

rotor.

3.Tighten:

AC magneto rotor nut 1

NOTE:

While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with

the sheave holder 3, tighten the generator

rotor nut.

Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the

projection 4 on the rotor.

Sheave holder:

P/N. YS-01880, 90890-01701

T

R

.

.

150 Nm (15.0 m • kg, 110 ft • lb)

4.Install:

AC magneto cover

Oil pipe holder 1

Ground lead 2

Bolts

NOTE:

Tighten the AC magneto cover bolts in stages,

using a crisscross pattern.

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

5 — 43

ENG

CLUTCH

CLUTCH

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the clutch cover Remove the parts in the order below.

Engine assembly Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.

1 Oil filter bolt 1

2 Union bolt 2

3 Copper washer 4

4 Oil delivery pipe 1 1

5 Union bolt 2

6 Copper washer 4

7 Oil delivery pipe 2 1

8 Clutch cover 1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

CLUTCH”.

9 Clutch cover gasket 1

10 Dowel pin 2

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 44

ENG

CLUTCH

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the pull lever shaft Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Circlip 1

2Pull lever 1

3 Pull lever spring 1

4Bolt 1

5Pull lever shaft 1

6 Oil seal 1

7 Bearing 1

8 Bearing 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 45

ENG

CLUTCH

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the clutch Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Clutch spring 5

Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”.2 Pressure plate 1

3Pull rod 1

4 Bearing 1

5 Friction plate 2 2 Inside diameter = 116 mm (4.57 in)

6 Clutch plate 7

7 Friction plate 1 6 Inside diameter = 112 mm (4.41 in)

8 Cushion spring 1

9 Lock washer 1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

CLUTCH”.

10 Clutch boss 1

5 — 46

ENG

CLUTCH

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

11 Thrust washer 1

12 Clutch housing 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”.

13 Lock washer 1

Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR AND BAL-

ANCER DRIVEN GEAR”.

14 Balancer driven gear 1

15 Straight key 1

16 Lock washer 1

17 Primary drive gear 1

18 Balancer drive gear 1

19 Spring 16

20 Dowel pin 16

21 Plate 1

22 Straight key 1

23 Washer 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 47

ENG

CLUTCH

REMOVING THE CLUTCH

1.Remove:

Clutch cover

NOTE:

Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in

stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of

the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.

2.Straighten the lock washer tab.

3.Loosen:

Clutch boss nut 1

NOTE:

While holding the clutch boss 2 with the clutch

holding tool 3, loosen the clutch boss nut.

Clutch holding tool:

P/N. YM-91042, 90890-04086

REMOVING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR

AND BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR

1.Straighten the lock washer tabs.

2.Loosen:

Primary drive gear nut 1

Balancer driven gear nut 2

NOTE:

Place an aluminum plate 3 between the teeth

of the balancer drive gear 4 and balancer

driven gear 5.

5 — 48

ENG

CLUTCH

CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATE

The following procedure applies to all of the

friction plates.

1.Check:

Friction plate

Damage/wear Replace the friction plates

as a set.

2.Measure:

Friction plate thickness

Out of specification Replace the friction

plates as a set.

NOTE:

Measure the friction plate at four places.

Friction plate 1 thickness:

2.74 ~ 2.86 mm (0.108 ~ 0.113 in)

<Limit>: 2.6 mm (0.102 in)

Friction plate 2 thickness:

2.94 ~ 3.06 mm (0.116 ~ 0.120 in)

<Limit>: 2.8 mm (0.110 in)

CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATE

The following procedure applies to all of the

clutch plates.

1.Check:

Clutch plate

Damage Replace the clutch plates as a

set.

2.Measure:

Clutch plate warpage

(with a surface plate and thickness gauge 1)

Out of specification Replace the clutch

plates as a set.

Maximum clutch plate warpage:

0.2 mm (0.008 in)

5 — 49

ENG

CLUTCH

CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRING

The following procedure applies to all of the

clutch springs.

1.Check:

Clutch spring

Damage Replace the clutch springs as a

set.

2.Measure:

Clutch spring free length a

Out of specification Replace the clutch

springs as a set.

Clutch spring free length:

42.8 mm (1.69 in)

<Limit>: 40.7 mm (1.60 in)

CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING

1.Check:

Clutch housing dogs

Damage/pitting/wear Deburr the clutch

housing dogs or replace the clutch housing.

NOTE:

Pitting on the clutch housing dogs will cause

erratic clutch operation.

CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS

1.Check:

Clutch boss splines

Damage/pitting/wear Replace the clutch

boss.

NOTE:

Pitting on the clutch boss splines will cause

erratic clutch operation.

CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE

1.Check:

Pressure plate

Cracks/damage Replace.

5 — 50

ENG

CLUTCH

CHECKING THE PULL LEVER SHAFT AND

PULL ROD

1.Check:

Pull lever shaft pinion gear teeth a

Pull rod teeth b

Damage/wear Replace the pull lever shaft

and pull rod as a set.

2.Check:

Pull rod bearing

Damage/wear Replace.

CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE

1.Check:

Primary drive gear 1

Primary driven gear 2

Damage/wear Replace the primary drive

gear and clutch housing as a set.

Excessive noise during operation Replace

the primary drive gear and clutch housing as

a set.

CHECKING THE BALANCER DRIVE

1.Check:

Balancer drive gear 1

Balancer driven gear 2

Damage/wear Replace the balancer drive

gear and balancer driven gear as a set.

Excessive noise during operation Replace

the balancer drive gear and balancer driven

gear as a set.

5 — 51

ENG

CLUTCH

INSTALLING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR

AND BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR

1.Install:

Dowel pin

Spring

Balancer drive gear

(onto the primary drive gear)

NOTE:

Align the punch mark a on the balancer drive

gear with the punch mark b on the primary

drive gear.

2.Install:

Primary drive gear

Balancer driven gear

NOTE:

Align the punch mark a on the balancer driven

gear with the punch mark b on the primary

drive gear.

3.Tighten:

Balancer driven gear nut 1

Primary drive gear nut 2

NOTE:

Place an aluminum plate 3 between the

teeth of the balancer drive gear 4 and bal-

ancer driven gear 5.

Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease to

the thread of axles and nuts.

4.Bend the lock washer tabs along the bal-

ancer driven gear nut.

5.Bend the lock washer tabs along a flat side

of the primary drive gear nut.

T

R

.

.

140 Nm (14.0 m • kg, 100 ft • lb)

T

R

.

.

150 Nm (15.0 m • kg, 110 ft • lb)

5 — 52

ENG

CLUTCH

INSTALLING THE CLUTCH

1.Install:

Clutch housing 1

NOTE:

Make sure that the primary driven gear teeth

and primary drive gear teeth mesh correctly.

Make sure that the oil pump drive gear teeth

and oil pump driven gear teeth mesh cor-

rectly.

2.Tighten:

Clutch boss nut 1

NOTE:

While holding the clutch boss 2 with the clutch

holding tool 3, tighten the clutch boss nut.

3.Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of

the nut.

Clutch holding tool:

P/N. YM-91042, 90890-04086

T

R

.

.

90 Nm (9.0 m • kg, 65 ft • lb)

4.Install:

Pressure plate 1

NOTE:

Align the punch mark a on the pressure plate

with the punch mark b on the clutch boss.

5 — 53

ENG

CLUTCH

5.Install:

Clutch spring

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crisscross

pattern.

T

R

.

.

8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • lb)

6.Install:

Clutch cover

NOTE:

Be sure to mesh the pull lever shaft with the

pull rod teeth to ensure that the mark a on pull

lever 1 is at the closest position to stationary

pointer b onto the clutch cover when the

clutch is engaged.

7.Install:

Clutch cable holder 1

Bolts

2Bolt: = 25 mm

3Bolt: = 30 mm

4Bolt: = 35 mm

5Bolt: = 50 mm

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crisscross

pattern.

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

5 — 54

ENG

OIL PUMP

OIL PUMP

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the oil pump Remove the parts in the order below.

Clutch Refer to “CLUTCH”.

1 Circlip 1

2 Oil pump driven gear 1

3 Oil pump 1

4 Oil pump gasket 1

5 O-ring 2

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 55

ENG

OIL PUMP

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the oil pump Remove the parts in the order below.

1Oil pump housing 1/oil seal 1/1

2Oil pump outer rotor 1 1

3Dowel pin 1

4Oil pump inner rotor 1 1

5Oil pump housing cover/oil seal 1/1

6Dowel pin 2

7Oil pump shaft 1

8Dowel pin 1

9Oil pump inner rotor 2 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE OIL

PUMP”.

0Oil pump outer rotor 2 1

AOil pump housing 2 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

5 — 56

ENG

OIL PUMP

CHECKING THE OIL PUMP

1.Check:

Oil pump driven gear

Oil pump housings

Oil pump housing cover

Cracks/wear/damage Replace.

2.Measure:

Tip clearance a

(between the inner rotor 1 and the outer

rotor 2)

Side clearance b

(between the outer rotor 2 and the pump

housing 3)

Out of specification Replace the oil pump.

Tip clearance a:

0.12 mm (0.005 in)

<Limit>: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)

Side clearance b:

0.03 ~ 0.08 mm (0.001 ~ 0.003 in)

3.Check:

Oil pump operation

Unsmooth Repeat steps (1) and (2) or

replace the defective parts.

ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP

1.Install:

Oil pump inner rotor 2

Oil pump outer rotor 2

NOTE:

Align the match mark a on the inner rotor 2

with the match mark b on the outer rotor 2.

5 — 57

ENG

SHIFT SHAFT

SHIFT SHAFT

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the shift shaft Remove the parts in the order below.

Clutch Refer to “CLUTCH”.

1 Shift arm 1

Refer to “INSTALLING THE SHIFT

SHAFT”.

2 Shift shaft 1

3 Shift shaft spring 1

4Collar 1

5Roller 1

6 Stopper lever 1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE STOPPER

LEVER”.

7 Stopper lever spring 1

8Roller 1

5 — 58

ENG

SHIFT SHAFT

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

9 Shift guide 1

Refer to “INSTALLING THE SHIFT

LEVER”.

10 Shift lever 1

11 Pawl 2

12 Pawl pin 2

13 Spring 2

14 Segment 1

15 Oil seal 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 59

ENG

SHIFT SHAFT

CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT

1.Check:

Shift shaft 1

Bends/damage/wear Replace.

Shift shaft spring 2

Damage/wear Replace.

CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER

1.Check:

Stopper lever 1

Bends/damage Replace.

Roller turns roughly Replace the stopper

lever.

Stopper spring 2

Damage Replace.

CHECKING THE SHIFT GUIDE AND SHIFT

LEVER

1.Check:

Shift guide 1

Shift lever 2

Pawl 3

Pawl pin 4

Spring 5

Damage/wear Replace.

CHECKING THE SEGMENT

1.Check:

Segment

Damage/wear Replace.

INSTALLING THE SHIFT LEVER

1.Install:

Segment 1

Segment bolt

NOTE:

Align the notch a on the segment with the pin

b on the shift cam.

T

R

.

.

30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • lb)

5 — 60

ENG

SHIFT SHAFT

2.Install:

Springs 1

Pawl pins 2

Pawls 3

Shift guide 4

(to the shift lever)

3.Install:

Shift lever assembly 1

Shift guide 2

NOTE:

The shift lever assembly is installed at the

same time as the shift guide.

INSTALLING THE STOPPER LEVER

1.Install:

Roller

Stopper lever spring 1

Stopper lever 2

NOTE:

Hook the ends of the stopper lever spring

onto the stopper lever and the crankcase

boss.

Mesh the stopper lever with the shift drum

segment.

5 — 61

ENG

SHIFT SHAFT

INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT

1.Install:

Roller 1

Collar

Shift shaft spring

Shift shaft 2

NOTE:

Install the end of the shift shaft spring onto

the shift shaft spring stopper 3.

Install the end of the shift shaft lever onto the

roller 1.

2.Install:

Shift arm 1

Bolt 2

NOTE:

Be sure to install the shaft arm so that position

a is horizontal.

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

5 — 62

ENG

CRANKCASE

CRANKCASE

TIMING CHAIN AND SPEED SENSOR ROTOR

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the timing chain and

speed sensor rotor

Remove the parts in the order below.

Engine assembly Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.

Cylinder head cover Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD COVER”.

Cylinder head Refer to “CAMSHAFT AND CYLINDER

HEAD”.

Cylinder and piston Refer to “CYLINDER AND PISTON”.

AC rotor Refer to “AC MAGNETO”.

Clutch, balancer drive gear and bal-

ancer driven gear

Refer to “CLUTCH”.

Oil pump Refer to “OIL PUMP”.

Shift shaft and shift drum segment Refer to “SHIFT SHAFT”.

1 Timing chain guide (intake) 1

2 Timing chain 1

5 — 63

ENG

CRANKCASE

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

3 Reverse shift lever 1

4 Reverse shift lever spring 1

5 Circlip 1

6 Neutral switch 1

7 Reverse switch 1

8 Oil pipe joint 1

9 Circlip 1

10 Wave washer 1

11 Speed sensor rotor 1

12 Circlip 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 64

ENG

CRANKCASE

CRANKCASE

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Separating the crankcase Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Right crankcase 1

Refer to “CRANKCASE”.

2 Dowel pin 2

3 Dowel pin/O-ring 1/1

4 Left crankcase 1

5 Oil strainer 1

6 Cover 1

7 Oil strainer gasket 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 65

ENG

CRANKCASE

CRANKCASE BEARING

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the crankcase bearing Remove the parts in the order below.

Crankshaft and balancer Refer to “CRANKSHAFT AND BAL-

ANCER”.

Transmission Refer to “TRANSMISSION”.

1 Oil seal retainer 1

2 Oil seal 3

3 Bearing retainer 3

4 Bearing 8

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 66

ENG

CRANKCASE

SEPARATING THE CRANKCASE

1.Separate:

Left crankcase

Right crankcase

***********************************************

Separation steps:

Remove the crankcase bolts.

NOTE:

Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time and

after all the bolts are loosened, remove

them.

Loosen the bolts in stages, using a criss-

cross pattern.

ÈLeft crankcase

ÉRight crankcase

Remove the right crankcase.

CAUTION:

Use a soft hammer to tap on one side of the

crankcase. Tap only on reinforced portions

of the crankcase. Do not tap on the crank-

case mating surfaces. Work slowly and

carefully. Make sure that the crankcase

halves separate evenly.

Remove the dowel pins and O-ring.

***********************************************

È

É

CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN AND GUIDE

1.Check:

Timing chain

Cracks/stiff Replace the timing chain and

camshaft sprocket as a set.

2.Check:

Intake side timing chain guide

Wear/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER

1.Check:

Oil strainer

Damage Replace.

Contaminations Clean with engine oil.

5 — 67

ENG

CRANKCASE

CHECKING THE CRANKCASE

1.Thoroughly wash the case halves in a mild

solvent.

2.Clean all the gasket mating surfaces and

crankcase mating surfaces thoroughly.

3.Check:

Crankcase

Cracks/damage Replace.

Oil delivery passages

Clogged Blow out with compressed air.

CHECKING THE BEARINGS

1.Check:

Bearing

Clean and lubricate, then rotate the inner

race with a finger.

Roughness Replace.

ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE

1.Apply:

Sealant (Quick Gasket®) 1

(to the mating surfaces of both case halves)

2.Install:

Dowel pin 2

O-ring 3

Sealant (Quick Gasket®):

P/N. ACC-11001-05-01

Yamaha bond No. 1215:

P/N. 90890-85505

New

5 — 68

ENG

CRANKCASE

3.Fit the right crankcase onto the left crank-

case. Tap lightly on the case with a soft ham-

mer.

CAUTION:

Before installing and torquing the crank-

case holding bolts, be sure to check

whether the transmission is functioning

properly by manually rotating the shift cam

in both directions.

4.Install:

Lead guides 1

Hose guide 2

Crankcase bolts

5.Tighten:

Crankcase bolts

(follow the proper tightening sequence)

ÈRight crankcase

ÉLeft crankcase

3Bolt: = 30 mm

4Bolt: = 45 mm

5Bolt: = 60 mm

6Bolt: = 65 mm

7Bolt: = 80 mm

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crisscross

pattern.

È

É

T

R

.

.

10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • lb)

6.Apply:

4-stroke engine oil

(to the crank pin, bearing and oil delivery

hole)

7.Check:

Crankshaft and transmission operation

Unsmooth operation Repair.

5 — 69

ENG

CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER

CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the crankshaft and bal-

ancer

Remove the parts in the order below.

Crankcase Separate. Refer to “CRANKCASE”.

1 Balancer 1

2 Crankshaft 1 Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

CRANKSHAFT”.

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 70

ENG

CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER

REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT

1.Remove:

Crankshaft

Use a crankcase separating tool 1.

Crankcase separating tool:

P/N. YU-01135-A, 90890-01135

CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT

1.Measure:

Crank width A

Out of specification Replace the crank-

shaft.

Side clearance D

Out of specification Replace the crank-

shaft.

Runout C

Out of specification Replace the crank-

shaft.

***********************************************

Crankshaft reassembling point:

The crankshaft 1 and the crank pin 2 oil pas-

sages must be properly interconnected with a

tolerance of less than 1 mm (0.04 in).

***********************************************

CAUTION:

The buffer boss and woodruff key should

be replaced when removed from the crank-

shaft.

Crank width:

74.95 ~ 75.00 mm

(2.9508 ~ 2.9528 in)

Big end side clearance:

0.32 ~ 0.64 mm

(0.0126 ~ 0.0252 in)

<Limit>: 1.0 mm (0.040 in)

Runout limit:

C1: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)

C2: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)

5 — 71

ENG

CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER

INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT

1.Install:

Crankshaft

NOTE:

Hold the connecting rod at the Top Dead Cen-

ter (TDC) with one hand while turning the nut

of the installing tool with the other. Operate the

installing tool until the crankshaft bottoms

against the bearing.

CAUTION:

Apply engine oil to each bearing to protect

the crankshaft against scratches and to

make installation easier.

Crankshaft installer pot 1:

P/N. 90890-01274

Crankshaft installer bolt 2:

P/N. 90890-01275

Crankshaft installer set 3:

P/N. YU-90050

Adapter 4:

P/N. YM-90069, 90890-04059

Spacer (crankshaft installer) 5:

P/N. YM-91044, 90890-04081

Spacer 6:

P/N. 90890-01016

5 — 72

ENG

TRANSMISSION

TRANSMISSION

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the transmission Remove the parts in the order below.

Crankcase Separate. Refer to “CRANKCASE”.

1 Shift fork guide bar (short) 1

Refer to “INSTALLING THE TRANSMIS-

SION”.

2 Shift fork “C” 1

3 Shift fork guide bar (long) 1

4 Shift fork “R” 1

5 Shift fork “L” 1

6 Shift drum 1

7 Reverse shift shaft 1

8 Main axle assembly 1

9 Spacer/O-ring 1/1

10 Drive axle 1

5 — 73

ENG

TRANSMISSION

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

11 Counter axle 1

12 Counter gear 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

5 — 74

ENG

TRANSMISSION

MAIN AXLE

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the main axle Remove the parts in the order below.

1Reverse pinion gear 1

24th pinion gear 1

32nd/3rd pinion gear 1

4Circlip 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE MAIN

AXLE AND DRIVE AXLE”.

5Toothed washer 1

65th pinion gear 1

7Main axle/1st pinion gear 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

5 — 75

ENG

TRANSMISSION

DRIVE AXLE

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the drive axle Remove the parts in the order below.

1Washer 1

21st wheel gear 1

35th wheel gear 1

4Circlip 3 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE MAIN

AXLE AND DRIVE AXLE”.

5Toothed washer 3

63rd wheel gear 1

7Toothed collar 2

8Toothed lock washer 1

9Toothed lock washer retainer 1

02nd wheel gear 1

5 — 76

ENG

TRANSMISSION

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

A4th wheel gear 1

BReverse wheel gear 1

CCollar 1

DDrive axle 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

5 — 77

ENG

TRANSMISSION

CHECKING THE SHIFT FORK

1.Check:

Shift fork cam follower 1

Shift fork pawl 2

Scoring/bends/wear/damage Replace.

2.Check:

Guide bar

Roll the guide bar on a flat surface.

Bends Replace.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent guide

bar.

3.Check:

Shift fork movement

(on the guide bar)

Unsmooth operation Replace the shift fork

and the guide bar as a set.

CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM

1.Check:

Shift cam grooves

Scratches/wear/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION

1.Measure:

Main axle runout

(with a centering device and dial gauge 1)

Out of specification Replace the main axle.

Maximum main axle runout:

0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

5 — 78

ENG

TRANSMISSION

2.Measure:

Drive axle runout

(with a centering device and dial gauge 1)

Out of specification Replace the drive axle.

Maximum drive axle runout:

0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

3.Check:

Transmission gears

Blue discoloration/pitting/wear Replace

the defective gear(s).

Transmission gear dogs

Cracks/damage/rounded edges Replace

the defective gear(s).

4.Check:

Transmission gear engagement

(each pinion gear to its respective wheel

gear)

Incorrect Reassemble the transmission

axle assemblies.

5.Check:

Transmission gear movement

Rough movement Replace the defective

part(s).

6.Check:

Circlips

Bends/damage/looseness Replace.

ASSEMBLING THE MAIN AXLE AND DRIVE

AXLE

1.Install:

Toothed washer 1

Circlip 2

NOTE:

Be sure the circlip shap-edged corner a is

positioned opposite side to the toothed

washer and gear.

Be sure the circlip end b is positioned at

axle spline groove c.

New

5 — 79

ENG

TRANSMISSION

2.Install:

Reverse pinion gear 1

NOTE:

Press the reverse pinion gear into the main

axle 2, as shown in the illustration.

a115.65 ~ 115.85 mm (4.553 ~ 4.561 in)

INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION

1.Install:

Shift drum 1

Shift fork “L” 2

Shift fork “R” 3

Shift fork guide bar (long) 4

Shift fork “C” 5

Shift fork guide bar (short) 6

NOTE:

The embossed marks on the shift forks should

face towards the right side of the engine and

be in the following sequence: “R”, “C”, “L”.

2.Check:

Transmission

Rough movement Repair.

NOTE:

Oil each gear and bearing thoroughly.

Before assembling the crankcase, be sure

that the transmission is in neutral and that

the gears turn freely.

6 — 1

COOL

RADIATOR

COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the radiator Remove the parts in the order below.

Front panel and front fender Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Coolant Drain.

1 Radiator fan coupler 1 Disconnect.

2 Thermo switch coupler 1 Disconnect.

3 Coolant reservoir hose 1

4 Radiator fan breather hose 1 Disconnect.

5 Radiator outlet hose 1 Disconnect.

6 Radiator inlet hose 1 Disconnect.

7 Radiator 1

8 Radiator fan 1

9 Thermo switch 1 1

10 Coolant reservoir breather hose 1

6 — 2

COOL

RADIATOR

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

11 Coolant reservoir 1

12 Coolant reservoir cap 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

6 — 3

COOL

RADIATOR

CHECKING THE RADIATOR

1.Check:

Radiator fins

Obstruction Clean.

Apply compressed air to the rear of the radia-

tor.

Damage Repair or replace.

OTE:

Straighten any flattened fins with a thin, flat-

head screwdriver.

2.Check:

Radiator hoses

Cracks/damage Replace.

3.Measure:

Radiator cap opening pressure

Below the specified pressure Replace the

radiator cap.

***********************************************

Measurement steps:

Install the radiator cap tester 1 and adapter

2 onto the radiator cap 3.

Apply the specified pressure for ten seconds

and make sure that there is no drop in pres-

sure.

***********************************************

4.Check:

Radiator fan

Damage Replace.

Malfunction Check and repair.

Refer to “COOLING SYSTEM” in CHAPTER

9.

Radiator cap opening pressure:

95 ~ 125 kPa

(0.95 ~ 1.25 kg/cm2,

13.8 ~ 18.1 psi)

Radiator cap tester:

P/N. YU-24460-01, 90890-01325

Adapter:

P/N. YU-33984, 90890-01352

6 — 4

COOL

RADIATOR

INSTALLING THE RADIATOR

1.Fill:

Cooling system

(with the specified amount of the recom-

mended coolant)

Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” in

CHAPTER 3.

2.Check:

Cooling system

Leaks Repair or replace any faulty part.

6 — 5

COOL

THERMOSTAT

THERMOSTAT

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the thermostat Remove the parts in the order below.

Front panel and front fender Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

Coolant Drain.

Radiator Refer to “RADIATOR”.

1 Radiator inlet hose 1

2 Front fender bracket 1

3 Thermostat inlet hose 1

4 Water jacket outlet pipe 1

5 O-ring 1

6 Thermostat assembly 1

7 Thermo switch 2 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

6 — 6

COOL

THERMOSTAT

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the thermostat Remove the parts in the order listed.

1Thermostat cover 1

Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE THERMO-

STAT”.

2O-ring 1

3Thermostat 1

4Thermostat housing 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

6 — 7

COOL

THERMOSTAT

CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT

1.Check:

Thermostat 1

Does not open at 69 ~ 73 °C (156.2 ~

163.4 °F) Replace.

***********************************************

Checking steps:

Suspend the thermostat in a container filled

with water.

Slowly heat the water.

Place a thermometer in the water.

While stirring the water, observe the thermo-

stat and thermometer’s indicated tempera-

ture.

***********************************************

1Thermostat

2Thermometer

3Water

4Container

ÈFully closed

ÉFully open

OTE:

If the accuracy of the thermostat is in doubt,

replace it. A faulty thermostat could cause seri-

ous overheating or overcooling.

2.Check:

Thermostat housing cover

Thermostat housing

Cracks/damage Replace.

ASSEMBLING THE THERMOSTAT

1.Install:

Thermostat 1

Thermostat housing cover

OTE:

Install the thermostat with its breather hole a

toward the projection b.

2.Fill:

Cooling system

(with the specified amount of the recom-

mended coolant)

Refer to “CHANGING THE COOLANT” in

CHAPTER 3.

3.Check:

Cooling system

Leak Repair or replace any faulty part.

6 — 8

COOL

WATER PUMP

WATER PUMP

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the water pump Remove the parts in the order below.

Coolant Drain.

1 Radiator outlet hose 1 Disconnect.

2 Water pump outlet hose 1

3 Water pump assembly 1

4 O-ring 1

5 Water jacket inlet housing 1

6 O-ring 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

6 — 9

COOL

WATER PUMP

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the water pump Remove the parts in the order below.

1Water pump housing cover 1

2O-ring 1

3Circlip 1

4Impeller shaft gear 1

5Pin 1

6Circlip 1

7Impeller 1 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEM-

BLING THE THERMOSTAT”.

8Impeller shaft 1

9Rubber damper holder 1

6 — 10

COOL

WATER PUMP

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

0Rubber damper 1

Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEM-

BLING THE THERMOSTAT”.

AWater pump seal 1

BOil seal 1

CBearing 1

DWater pump housing 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

6 — 11

COOL

WATER PUMP

DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP

1.Remove:

Impeller shaft 1

OTE:

Tap out the impeller shaft from the impeller.

2.Remove:

Rubber damper holder 1

Rubber damper 2

(from the impeller, with a thin, flathead

screwdriver)

OTE:

Do not scratch the impeller.

3.Remove:

Water pump seal 1

OTE:

Tap out the water pump seal from the inside of

the water pump housing.

2Water pump housing

4.Remove:

Oil seal 1

Bearing 2

OTE:

Tap out the bearing and oil seal from the out-

side of the water pump housing.

3Water pump housing

CHECKING THE WATER PUMP

1.Check:

Water pump housing cover 1

Water pump housing 2

Impeller 3

Impeller shaft 4

Rubber damper 5

Rubber damper holder 6

Cracks/damage/wear Replace.

6 — 12

COOL

WATER PUMP

2.Check:

Water pump seal

Oil seal

Water pump outlet pipe

Cracks/damage/wear Replace.

Bearing

Rough movement Replace.

New

ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP

1.Install:

Oil seal 1

(into the water pump housing 2)

OTE:

Before installing the oil seal, apply tap water

or coolant onto its outer surface.

Install the oil seal with a socket 3 that

matches its outside diameter.

2.Install:

Water pump seal 1

(into the water pump housing 2)

CAUTION:

Never lubricate the water pump seal sur-

face with oil or grease.

OTE:

Install the water pump seal with the special

tools.

ÈPush down.

Mechanical seal installer 3:

P/N. YM-33221, 90890-04078

Middle driven shaft bearing driver

4:

P/N. YM-04058-1, 90890-04058

New

New

3.Install:

Rubber damper 1

Rubber damper holder 2

OTE:

Before installing the rubber damper, apply tap

water or coolant onto its outer surface.

New

New

6 — 13

COOL

WATER PUMP

4.Measure:

Impeller shaft tilt

Out of specification Repeat steps (3) and

(4).

CAUTION:

Make sure that the rubber damper and rub-

ber damper holder are bottom with the

impeller.

1Straightedge

2Impeller

Max. impeller shaft tilt:

0.15 mm (0.006 in)

7 — 1

CARB

CARBURETORS

CARBURETION

CARBURETORS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the carburetors Remove the parts in the order below.

Seat/front fender/fuel tank/rubber cover

2Refer to “SEAT, FENDERS AND FUEL

TANK” in CHAPTER 3.

1 Air vent hose 2

2 Float chamber breather hose 1

3 Starter cable/starter plunger 1/1

4 Throttle valve cover 1

5 Throttle cable end 1

6 Throttle cable 1

7 Clamp screw (air filter case) 2 Loosen.

8 Clamp screw (carburetor joint) 2 Loosen.

9 Carburetors 1

For installation, reverse the removal pro-

cedure.

7 — 2

CARB

CARBURETORS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Separating the carburetors Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Drain hose 2

2 Plate 1

3 Connecting bolt/spacer 2/2

4Spring 1

5Hose joint 1

6Pipe 1

7 Carburetor 2 1

8 Carburetor 1 1

For installation, reverse the separating

procedure.

7 — 3

CARB

CARBURETORS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Disassembling the carburetor Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Throttle stop screw 1

2 Vacuum chamber cover 1

3 Spring 1

4 Jet needle holder 1

5 Spring 1

6 Jet needle set 1

7 Piston valve 1

8 Float chamber 1

9 Drain screw 1

0 Float 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE CARBURE-

TOR”.

A Needle valve set 1

7 — 4

CARB

CARBURETORS

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

B Pilot jet 1

C Pilot screw set 1 Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/

ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR”.

OTE:

Before disassembling the carburetor,

make sure to note the number of times

the pilot screw is turned out from the

seated position to its set position.

D Main jet 1

E Needle jet 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE CARBURE-

TOR”.

F Starter jet 1

G Pilot air jet 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

7 — 5

CARB

CARBURETORS

DISASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR

OTE:

Before disassembling the carburetor, make

sure to note the number of times the pilot

screw is turned out from the seated position to

its set position.

CHECKING THE CARBURETOR

1.Check:

Carburetor body

Float chamber

Cracks/damage Replace.

Fuel passage

Contamination Clean as indicated.

Fuel chamber body

Contamination Clean.

***********************************************

Cleaning steps:

Wash the carburetor in a petroleum based

solvent.

(Do not use any caustic carburetor cleaning

solution.)

Blow out all of the passages and jets with

compressed air.

***********************************************

2.Check:

Float 1

Float tang 2

Damage Replace.

3.Check:

Valve seat 1

Needle valve 2

O-ring 3

Contamination/wear/damage Replace as

a set.

OTE:

Always replace the needle valve and valve

seat as a set.

7 — 6

CARB

CARBURETORS

4.Check:

Piston valve 1

Scratches/wear/damage Replace.

Rubber diaphragm 2

Tears Replace.

5.Check:

Vacuum chamber cover 1

Spring 2

Cracks/damage Replace.

6.Check:

Jet needle 1

Main jet 2

Needle jet 3

Pilot air jet 4

Pilot jet 5

Pilot screw 6

Starter jet 7

Starter plunger 8

Bends/wear/damage Replace.

Blockage Blow out the jets with

compressed air.

7.Check:

Free movement (piston valve)

Sticks Replace the piston valve guide and

the piston valve.

Insert the piston valve into the carburetor

body, and check for free movement.

8.Check:

Free movement (throttle valve)

Sticks Replace.

7 — 7

CARB

CARBURETORS

ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR

CAUTION:

Before reassembling, wash all of the parts

in a clean petroleum based solvent.

1.Install:

Pilot screw 1

OTE:

Before assembling the carburetor, make sure

to turn out the pilot screw the same number of

times, as noted before disassembly, from the

seated position to the set position.

2.Measure:

Float height a

Out of specification Adjust.

***********************************************

Measurement and adjustment steps:

Hold the carburetor in an upside down

position.

Measure the distance from the front mating

surface of the float chamber (gasket

removed) to the top of the float.

OTE:

The float arm should be resting on the needle

valve, but not compressing it.

If the float height is not within the

specification, inspect the valve seat and

needle valve.

If either is worn, replace them both.

If both are fine, adjust the float height by

bending the float tang 1 on the float.

Recheck the float height.

***********************************************

Float height (F.H.):

13 mm (0.51 in)

7 — 8

CARB

CARBURETORS

3.Install:

Carburetor 1

Carburetor 2

Pipe

Hose joint

Spring

OTE:

Install the throttle valve lever 1 onto

carburetor 2 between the spring 2 and

synchronizing screw 3.

Make sure the throttle valves operate

smoothly and that the synchronization is

correct.

ADJUSTING THE FUEL LEVEL

1.Measure:

Fuel level a

Out of specification Adjust.

Fuel level:

3 ~ 4 mm (0.12 ~ 0.16 in)

Below the float chamber mating

surface

***********************************************

Fuel level measurement and adjustment

steps:

Place the machine on a level surface.

Connect the fuel level gauge 1 to the drain

pipe 2.

Loosen the drain screw 3.

Hold the gauge vertically next to the float

chamber line.

Measure the fuel level a with the gauge.

If the fuel level is incorrect, adjust the fuel

level.

Fuel level gauge:

P/N. YM-01312-A, 90890-01312

7 — 9

CARB

CARBURETORS

Remove the carburetor.

Inspect the valve seat and needle valve.

If either is worn, replace them both.

If both are fine, adjust the float level by

bending the float tang 4 slightly.

Install the carburetor.

Recheck the fuel level.

***********************************************

8 — 1

–+

ELEC

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

EB800000 ELECTRICAL

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1Main switch

2Front brake switch

3Indicator light

4Circuit breaker (fan)

5Park switch

6Clutch switch

7Handlebar switch (left)

8Fuse

9Starter relay

0Tail/brake light

ARectifier/regulator

BCDI unit

CBattery

DNeutral switch

EReverse switch

FSpeed sensor

GRear brake switch

HIgnition coil

IHeadlight

JThermo switch 1

KFan

LThermo switch 2

MDiode

8 — 2

–+

ELEC

CHECKING THE SWITCH

CHECKING THE SWITCH

CHECKING THE SWITCH

Use a pocket tester to check the terminals for

continuity. If the continuity is faulty at any

point, replace the switch.

OTE:

Set the pocket tester to “0” before starting

the test.

The pocket tester should be set to the Ω × 1”

range when testing the switch for continuity.

Turn the switch on and off a few times when

checking it.

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

CHECKING A SWITCH SHOWN IN THE

MANUAL

The terminal connections for switches (main

switch, handlebar switch, engine stop switch,

light switch, etc.) are shown in a chart similar

to the one on the left.

This chart shows the switch positions in the

column and the switch lead colors in the top

row.

For each switch position, “ ” indicates

the terminals with continuity.

The example chart shows that:

1There is continuity between the “Red and

Brown” leads when the switch is set to “ON”.

8 — 3

–+

ELEC

CHECKING THE SWITCH

CHECKING THE SWITCH CONTINUITY

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH” and check for continuity between lead terminals.

Poor connection, no continuity Correct or replace.

* The coupler locations are circled.

8 — 4

–+

ELEC

CHECKING THE SWITCH

1Lights switch

2Engine stop switch

3Start switch

4Main switch

5Front brake switch

6Clutch switch

7Park switch

8Fuse

9Reverse switch

0Neutral switch

ARear brake switch

8 — 5

–+

ELEC

IGNITION SYSTEM

EB802000

IGNITION SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1AC magneto

3Main switch

4Battery

5Fuse

0CDI unit

AIgnition coil

BSpark plug

PEngine stop switch

8 — 6

–+

ELEC

IGNITION SYSTEM

EB802010

TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure

Check:

1.Fuse

2.Battery

3.Spark plug

4.Ignition spark gap

5.Spark plug cap resistance

6.Ignition coil resistance

IF THE IGNITION SYSTEM FAILS TO OPERATE (NO SPARK OR INTERMITTENT SPARK):

7.Engine stop switch

8.Main switch

9.Pickup coil resistance

10.Charging/rotor rotation direction detection

coil resistance

11.Wiring connection (the entire ignition sys-

tem)

OTE:

Remove the following part(s) before trouble-

shooting:

1)Seat

2)Front fender

Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-

shooting.

Dynamic spark tester:

P/N. YM-34487

Ignition checker:

P/N. 90890-06754

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

EB802011

CONTINUITY

1.Fuse

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

EB802012

CORRECT

2.Battery

Check the battery condition.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in

CHAPTER 3.

Open-circuit voltage:

12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)

INCORRECT

Clean the battery terminals.

Recharge or replace the battery.

3.Spark plug

Check the spark plug condition.

Check the spark plug type.

Check the spark plug gap.

Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG”

in CHAPTER 3.

Standard spark plug:

DPR8EA-9/NGK

8 — 7

–+

ELEC

IGNITION SYSTEM

CORRECT

Spark plug gap:

0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.031 ~ 0.035 in)

INCORRECT

Repair or replace the spark plug.

For USA and CDN

4.Ignition spark gap

Disconnect the spark plug cap from the

spark plug.

Connect the dynamic spark tester 1 as

shown.

2 Spark plug cap

3 Spark plug

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Check the ignition spark gap.

Crank the engine by pushing the starter

switch, and increase the spark gap until a

misfiring occurs.

Minimum spark gap:

6.0 mm (0.24 in)

MEETS SPECIFICATION

The ignition system is not faulty.

For Europe

OUT OF

SPECIFICATION

OR NO SPARK

4.Ignition spark gap

Disconnect the spark plug cap from the

spark plug.

Connect the ignition checker 1 as shown.

2 Spark plug cap

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Check the ignition spark gap a.

Crank the engine by pushing the starter

switch, and increase the spark gap until a

misfiring occurs.

Minimum spark gap:

6.0 mm (0.24 in)

*

MEETS SPECIFICATION

The ignition system is not faulty.

8 — 8

–+

ELEC

IGNITION SYSTEM

5.Spark plug cap resistance

Remove the spark plug cap.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1k) to the

spark plug cap.

*

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Check that the spark plug cap has the

specified resistance.

Spark plug cap resistance:

10 k at 20 °C (68 °F)

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

Replace the spark plug cap.

6.Ignition coil resistance

Disconnect the ignition coil connector from

the wire harness.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1) to the

ignition coil.

Tester (+) lead Orange lead terminal

Tester (–) lead Ignition coil base

Check that the primary coil has the speci-

fied resistance.

Primary coil resistance:

0.18 ~ 0.28 at 20 °C (68 °F)

8 — 9

–+

ELEC

IGNITION SYSTEM

BOTH MEET

SPECIFICATION

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1k) to the

ignition coil.

Tester (+) lead Orange lead terminal

Tester (–) lead Spark plug lead

Check that the secondary coil has the

specified resistance.

Secondary coil resistance:

6.32 ~ 9.48 k at 20 °C (68 °F)

Replace the ignition coil.

CORRECT

7.Engine stop switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

INCORRECT

Replace the handlebar switch (left).

CORRECT

8.Main switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

INCORRECT

Replace the main switch.

9.Pickup coil resistance

Disconnect the AC magneto coupler from

the wire harness.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 100) to the

pickup coil terminal.

Tester (+) lead White/Red terminal 1

Tester (–) lead White/Green terminal 2

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Check the pickup coil for the specified

resistance.

Pickup coil resistance:

445 ~ 545 at 20 °C (68 °F)

(White/Red – White/Green)

*

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

Replace the pickup coil/starter assembly.

8 — 10

–+

ELEC

IGNITION SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

10.Charging/rotor rotation direction detec-

tion coil resistance

Disconnect the AC magneto coupler from

the wire harness.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 100) to the

charging/rotor rotation direction detection

coil terminal.

Tester (+) lead Red terminal 1

Tester (–) lead White/Blue terminal 2

Check the charging/rotor rotation direction

detection coil for the specified resistance.

Rotor rotation direction detec-

tion coil resistance:

0.069 ~ 0.085 at 20 °C (68 °F)

(Red – White/Blue)

*

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

Replace the pickup coil/stator assembly.

CORRECT

11.Wiring connection

Check the connections of the entire ignition

system.

Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.

Replace the CDI unit.

POOR CONNECTION

Properly connect the ignition system.

8 — 11

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

EB803000

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

3Main switch

4Battery

5Fuse

6Starter relay

7Starter motor

8Clutch switch

9Park switch

0CDI unit

JNeutral switch

PEngine stop switch

QStart switch

8 — 12

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION

The starting circuit on this model consists of

the starter motor, starter relay, clutch switch,

CDI unit and neutral switch. If the main switch

is on and the engine stop switch is in the RUN

position, the starter motor can be operated

only if:

1Fuse

2Battery

3Starter relay

4Starter motor

5Start switch

6CDI unit

7Engine stop switch

8Neutral switch

9Clutch switch

ÈTO MAIN SWITCH

ÉFROM MAIN SWITCH

The transmission is in neutral (the neutral

switch is closed).

or

You pull in the clutch lever (the clutch

switch is closed).

8 — 13

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

EB803020

TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure

Check:

1.Fuse

2.Battery

3.Starter motor

4.Starter relay

5.Main switch

6.Engine stop switch

IF THE STARTER MOTOR FAILS TO OPERATE:

7.Start switch

8.Neutral switch

9.Clutch switch

10.Wiring connection (the entire starting sys-

tem)

OTE:

Remove the following part(s) before trouble-

shooting:

1)Seat

2)Front fender

3)Rear fender

4)Exhaust pipe

Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-

shooting.

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

EB802011

CONTINUITY

1.Fuse

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

EB802012

CORRECT

2.Battery

Check the battery condition.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in

CHAPTER 3.

Open-circuit voltage:

12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)

*

INCORRECT

Clean the battery terminals.

Recharge or replace the battery.

8 — 14

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

TURNS

3.Starter motor

Connect the battery positive terminal 1

and starter motor cable 2 using a jumper

lead 3 .

Check the operation of the starter motor.

*

*

WARNING

A wire that is used as a jumper lead must

have the equivalent capacity or more as

that of the battery lead, otherwise the

jumper lead may burn.

This check is likely to produce sparks, so

be sure that no flammable gas or fluid is

in the vicinity.

*

DOES NOT TURN

Repair or replace the starter motor.

4.Starter relay

Remove the starter relay from the wire har-

ness.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1) and the

battery (12 V) to the starter relay terminals.

CONTINUITY

Battery (+) terminal

Yellow/Black terminal 1

Battery (–) terminal

Blue/Black terminal 2

Tester (+) lead Red terminal 3

Tester (–) lead Black terminal 4

Check the starter relay for continuity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the starter relay.

CORRECT

5.Main switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

*

INCORRECT

Replace the main switch.

8 — 15

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

CORRECT

6.Engine stop switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

*

INCORRECT

Replace the handlebar switch (right).

CORRECT

7.Start switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

INCORRECT

Replace the handlebar switch (left).

CORRECT

8.Neutral switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

INCORRECT

Replace the neutral switch.

CORRECT

9.Clutch switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

INCORRECT

Replace the clutch switch.

EB803028

10.Wiring connection

Check the connections of the entire starting

system.

Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.

POOR CONNECTION

Properly connect the starting system.

8 — 16

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

STARTER MOTOR

Order Job name/Part name Q’ty Remarks

Removing the starter motor Remove the parts in the order below.

Exhaust pipe Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.

1 Parking brake cable 1 Disconnect.

2 Starter motor lead 1

3Starter motor/O-ring 1/1

Disassembling the starter motor Remove the parts in the order below.

1 Starter motor drive gear 1

2 Bracket 1 1

Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE STARTER

MOTOR”.

3 Washer kit

4 Bracket 2 1

5 Shims

6 Brush seat 1/brush seat 2 1/1

7 Armature coil 1

8 Yoke 1

For assembly, reverse the disassembly

procedure.

8 — 17

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR

1.Check:

Commutator

Dirty Clean it with #600 grit sandpaper.

2.Measure:

Commutator diameter a

Out of specification Replace the starter

motor.

3.Measure:

Mica undercut b

Out of specification Scrape the mica using

a hacksaw blade.

OTE:

Scrape the mica to the proper measurement

using a hacksaw blade which has been

grounded to fit the commutator.

Outside diameter:

28 mm (1.10 in)

<Wear limit:>

27 mm (1.06 in)

Mica undercut:

0.7 mm (0.03 in)

4.Check:

Armature coil (insulation/continuity)

Defects Replace the starter motor.

***********************************************

Armature coil checking steps:

Connect the pocket tester for the continuity

check 1 and insulation check 2.

Measure the armature resistances.

If the resistance is incorrect, replace the

starter motor.

***********************************************

Armature coil resistance:

Continuity check 1:

0.025 ~ 0.035 at 20 °C (68 °F)

Insulation check 2:

More than 1 M at 20 °C (68 °F)

8 — 18

–+

ELEC

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

5.Measure:

Brush length a (each)

Out of specification Replace the brush.

Brush length:

12.5 mm (0.49 in)

<Wear limit:>

5 mm (0.20 in)

6.Measure:

Brush spring force

Fatigue/out of specification Replace as a

set.

Brush spring force:

7.65 ~ 10.01 Nm

(27.5 ~ 36.0 oz)

7.Check:

Oil seal

Bushing

O-rings

Wear/damage Replace.

ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR

1.Install:

Brush seat 1

OTE:

Align the projection a on the brush seat with

the slot b on the housing.

2.Install:

Yoke

Brackets

OTE:

Align the match marks a on the yoke with the

match marks b on the brackets.

8 — 19

–+

ELEC

CHARGING SYSTEM

EB804000

CHARGING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1AC magneto

2Rectifier/regulator

4Battery

5Fuse

8 — 20

–+

ELEC

CHARGING SYSTEM

EB804010

TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure

Check:

1.Fuse

2.Battery

3.Charging voltage

IF THE BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED:

4.Charging coil resistance

5.Wiring connections

(the entire charging system)

OTE:

Remove the following part(s) before trouble-

shooting:

1)Seat

Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-

shooting.

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

EB802011

CONTINUITY

1.Fuse

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

EB802012

CORRECT

2.Battery

Check the battery condition.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in

CHAPTER 3.

Open-circuit voltage:

12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)

INCORRECT

Clean the battery terminals.

Recharge or replace the battery.

EB804011

3.Charging voltage

Connect the tachometer to the spark plug

lead.

Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the

battery.

Tester (+) lead Battery (+) terminal

Tester (–) lead Battery (–) terminal

8 — 21

–+

ELEC

CHARGING SYSTEM

OUT OF

SPECIFICATION

Start the engine and accelerate to about

5,000 r/min.

Charging voltage:

14 V at 5,000 r/min

MEETS SPECIFICATION

The charging circuit is not faulty.

EB804012

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

4.Charging coil resistance

Disconnect the AC magneto coupler from

the wire harness.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1) to the

charging coils.

Tester (+) lead White terminal 1

Tester (–) lead White terminal 2

Tester (+) lead White terminal 1

Tester (–) lead White terminal 3

Tester (+) lead White terminal 2

Tester (–) lead White terminal 3

Measure the stator coil resistance.

Charging coil resistance:

0.43 ~ 0.65 at 20 °C (68 °F)

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

Replace the pickup coil/stator assembly.

EB804015

CORRECT

5.Wiring connections

Check the connections of the entire charg-

ing system.

Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.

Replace the rectifier/regulator.

POOR CONNECTION

Properly connect the charging system.

8 — 22

–+

ELEC

LIGHTING SYSTEM

EB805000

LIGHTING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

3Main switch

4Battery

5Fuse

OLights switch

RHeadlight

STail/brake light

8 — 23

–+

ELEC

LIGHTING SYSTEM

EB805010

TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure

Check:

1.Fuse

2.Battery

3.Main switch

IF THE HEADLIGHT AND/OR TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT FAIL TO COME ON:

4.Lights switch

5.Wiring connections

(the entire lighting system)

OTE:

Remove the following part(s) before trouble-

shooting:

1)Seat

2)Front fender

Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-

shooting.

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

EB802011

CONTINUITY

1.Fuse

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

EB802012

CORRECT

2.Battery

Check the battery condition.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in

CHAPTER 3.

Open-circuit voltage:

12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)

*

INCORRECT

Clean the battery terminals.

Recharge or replace the battery.

8 — 24

–+

ELEC

LIGHTING SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

CORRECT

3.Main switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

*

INCORRECT

Replace the main switch.

CORRECT

4.Lights switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

INCORRECT

Lights switch is faulty, replace the handlebar

switch (left).

EB805013

CORRECT

5.Wiring connection

Check the connections of the entire lighting

system.

Refer to “WIRING DIAGRAM”.

Check the condition of each of the lighting

system’s circuits.

Refer to “CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYS-

TEM”.

POOR CONNECTION

Properly connect the lighting system.

8 — 25

–+

ELEC

LIGHTING SYSTEM

EB805020

CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM

1.If the headlights fail to come on:

CONTINUITY

1.Bulb and bulb socket

Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-

ity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

2.Voltage

Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the

headlight couplers.

Tester (+) lead

Green terminal 1 or Yellow terminal 2

Tester (–) lead Black terminal 3

ÈWhen the lights switch is on “LO”.

ÉWhen the lights switch is on “HI”.

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Turn the lights switch to “LO” or “HI”.

Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Green”

and “Yellow” leads on the bulb socket con-

nector.

This circuit is not faulty.

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

8 — 26

–+

ELEC

LIGHTING SYSTEM

EB805021

2.If the tail/brake light fails to come on:

CONTINUITY

1.Bulb and bulb socket

Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-

ity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

2.Voltage

Connect the pocket tester (20 V) to the bulb

socket coupler.

Tester (+) lead Blue terminal 1

Tester (–) lead Black terminal 2

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Turn the lights switch to “LO” or “HI”.

Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Blue” lead

on the bulb socket connector.

This circuit is not faulty.

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

8 — 27

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

EB806000

SIGNAL SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

3Main switch

4Battery

5Fuse

0CDI unit

CSpeed sensor

GCoolant temperature

warning light

HReverse indicator light

INeutral indicator light

JNeutral switch

KReverse switch

LDiode

MThermo switch 2

PEngine stop switch

QStart switch

STail/brake light

TRear brake switch

UFront brake switch

8 — 28

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

EB806010

TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure

Check:

1.Fuse

2.Battery

3.Main switch

4.Wiring connections

(the entire signal system)

IF THE TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT AND/OR INDICATOR LIGHT FAILS TO COME ON:

OTE:

Remove the following part(s) before trouble-

shooting:

1)Seat

2)Front fender

3)Rear fender

Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-

shooting.

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

EB802011

CONTINUITY

1.Fuse

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

EB802012

CORRECT

2.Battery

Check the battery condition.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in

CHAPTER 3.

Open-circuit voltage:

12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)

*

INCORRECT

Clean the battery terminals.

Recharge or replace the battery.

8 — 29

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

CORRECT

3.Main switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

*

INCORRECT

Replace the main switch.

EB806011

CORRECT

4.Wiring connections

Check the connections of the entire signal

system.

Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.

Check the condition of each of the signal sys-

tem’s circuits.

Refer to “CHECKING THE SIGNAL SYS-

TEM”.

POOR CONNECTION

Properly connect the signal system.

8 — 30

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

CHECKING THE SIGNAL SYSTEM

1.If the tail/brake light fails to come on:

CONTINUITY

1.Bulb and bulb socket

Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-

ity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

CONTINUITY

2.Brake switches

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the brake switch.

3.Voltage

Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the

bulb socket coupler.

Tester (+) lead Yellow terminal 1

Tester (–) lead Black terminal 2

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Turn the lights switch to “LO” or “HI”.

Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Yellow”

lead on the bulb socket connector.

This circuit is not faulty.

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

8 — 31

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

EB806024

2.If the neutral indicator light fails to come on:

CONTINUITY

1.Bulb and bulb socket

Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-

ity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

CONTINUITY

2.Neutral switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the neutral switch.

3.Voltage

Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the

bulb socket coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal 1

Tester (–) lead Sky blue terminal 2

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Check the voltage (12 V).

This circuit is not faulty.

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

8 — 32

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

3.If the reverse indicator light fails to come on:

CONTINUITY

1.Bulb and bulb socket

Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-

ity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

CONTINUITY

2.Reverse switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the reverse switch.

3.Voltage

Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the

bulb socket coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal 1

Tester (–) lead Green/Blue terminal 2

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Check the voltage (12 V).

This circuit is not faulty.

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

8 — 33

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

4.If the coolant temperature warning light does not come on when the start switch is pushed on, or if

the coolant temperature warning light does not come on when the temperature is high (more than

117 ~ 123 °C (242.6 ~ 253.4 °F)):

CONTINUITY

1.Bulb and bulb socket

Check the bulb and bulb socket for continu-

ity.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

GOOD

CONDITION

2.Thermo switch 2

Remove the thermo switch from the ther-

mostat housing.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1) to the

thermo switch 1.

Immerse the thermo switch in coolant 2.

Check the thermo switch for continuity.

While heating the coolant use a thermome-

ter 3 to record the temperatures.

Test

step Water temperature Good

condition

Thermo switch

10 ~ 115 ± 3 °C

(32 ~ 239 ± 5.4 °F) ×

2More than 120 ± 3 °C

(248 ± 5.4 °F)

3* 120 ± 3 to 115 ± 3 °C

(248 ± 5.4 to

239 ± 5.4 °F)

4* Less than 115 ± 3 °C

(239 ± 5.4 °F) ×

Tests 1 & 2; Heat-up tests

Tests 3* & 4*; Cool-down tests

: Continuity × : No continuity

T

R

.

.

Thermo switch:

2.8 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)

Three bond sealock® #10

WARNING

Handle the thermo switch with special

care.

Never subject it to a strong shock or

allow it to be dropped. Should it be

dropped, it must be replaced.

*

BAD CONDITION

Replace the thermo switch 2.

8 — 34

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

3.Voltage

Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the

bulb socket coupler.

Tester (+) lead Red/Black terminal 1

Tester (–) lead White/Blue terminal 2

*

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

Turn the main switch to “ON”.

Check the voltage (12 V).

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

CORRECT

4.Diode

Remove the diode from the coupler.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1) to the

diode terminals as shown.

Check the diode for continuity as follows.

Tester positive probe

Blue/Black 1

Tester negative probe

White/Blue 2

Continu-

ity

Tester positive probe

White/Blue 2

Tester negative probe

Blue/Black 1

No conti-

nuity

*

OTE:

When you switch the tester’s positive and

negative probes, the readings in the left

chart will be reversed.

INCORRECT

Replace the diode.

8 — 35

–+

ELEC

SIGNAL SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

CORRECT

5.Start switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

This circuit is not faulty.

*

INCORRECT

Replace the handlebar switch (left).

8 — 36

–+

ELEC

COOLING SYSTEM

COOLING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

3Main switch

4Battery

5Fuse

DCircuit breaker (fan motor)

EThermo switch 1

FFan motor

8 — 37

–+

ELEC

COOLING SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure

Check:

1.Fuse

2.Battery

3.Main switch

4.Fan motor

5.Circuit breaker (fan motor)

IF THE FAN MOTOR DOES NOT MOVE:

6.Thermo switch 1

7.Wiring connection

(the entire cooling system)

OTE:

Remove the following part(s) before trouble-

shooting.

1)Seat

2)Front fender

Use the following special tool(s) for trouble-

shooting.

Pocket tester:

P/N. YU-03112, 90890-03112

EB802011

CONTINUITY

1.Fuse

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

NO CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

EB802012

CORRECT

2.Battery

Check the battery condition.

Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in

CHAPTER 3.

Open-circuit voltage:

12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)

INCORRECT

Clean the battery terminals.

Recharge or replace the battery.

CORRECT

3.Main switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

*

INCORRECT

Replace the main switch.

8 — 38

–+

ELEC

COOLING SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

TURNS

4.Fan motor

Disconnect the fan motor coupler.

Connect the battery (12 V) as shown.

Battery (+) lead Blue terminal 1

Battery (–) lead Black terminal 2

Check the operation of the fan motor.

*

DOES NOT TURN

Replace the fan motor.

MEETS

SPECIFICATION

5.Circuit breaker (fan motor)

Remove the circuit breaker from the wire

harness.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 1) to the cir-

cuit breaker.

Circuit breaker resistance:

Zero at 20 °C (68 °F)

*

OUT OF SPECIFICATION

Replace the circuit breaker.

8 — 39

–+

ELEC

COOLING SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

GOOD

CONDITION

6.Thermo switch 1

Remove the thermo switch from the radia-

tor.

Connect the pocket tester ( × 10) to the

thermo switch 1.

Immerse the thermo switch in coolant 2.

Check the thermo switch for continuity.

While heating the coolant use a thermome-

ter 3 to record the temperatures.

Test

step Water temperature Good

condition

Thermo switch

10 ~ 92 ± 3 °C

(32 ~ 197.6 ± 5.4 °F) ×

2More than 98 ± 3 °C

(208.4 ± 5.4 °F)

3* 98 ± 3 to 92 ± 3 °C

(208.4 ± 5.4 to

197.6 ± 5.4 °F)

4* Less than 92 ± 3 °C

(197.6 ± 5.4 °F) ×

Tests 1 & 2; Heat-up tests

Tests 3* & 4*; Cool-down tests

: Continuity × : No continuity

T

R

.

.

Thermo switch:

28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 20 ft • lb)

Three bond sealock® #10

*

WARNING

Handle the thermo switch with special

care.

Never subject it to a strong shock or

allow it to be dropped. Should it be

dropped, it must be replaced.

*

BAD CONDITION

Replace the thermo switch 1.

8 — 40

–+

ELEC

COOLING SYSTEM

C0NTINUITY

EB803028

CORRECT

7.Wiring connection

Check the connections of the entire starting

system.

Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.

This circuit is not faulty.

*

POOR CONNECTION

Properly connect the cooling system.

9 — 1

TRBL

SHTG

STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING

TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTE:

The following troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of trouble. It should be helpful,

however, as a guide to troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this manual for inspection,

adjustment and replacement of parts.

STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING

FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel tank

Empty

Clogged fuel filter

Clogged fuel strainer

Clogged fuel breather hose

Deteriorated or contaminated fuel

Fuel cock

Clogged fuel hose

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Spark plug

Improper plug gap

Worn electrodes

Wire between terminals broken

Improper heat range

Faulty spark plug cap

Ignition coil

Broken or shorted primary/secondary

Faulty spark plug lead

Broken body

CDI system

Faulty CDI unit

Faulty pickup coil

Broken woodruff key

Carburetor

Deteriorated or contaminated fuel

Clogged pilot jet

Clogged pilot air passage

Sucked-in air

Deformed float

Worn needle valve

Improperly sealed valve seat

Improperly adjusted fuel level

Improperly set pilot jet

Clogged starter jet

Starter plunger malfunction

Air filter

Clogged air filter element

Switches and wiring

Faulty main switch

Faulty engine stop switch

Broken or shorted wiring

Faulty neutral switch

Faulty start switch

Faulty clutch switch

Starter motor

Faulty starter motor

Faulty starter relay

Faulty starter circuit cut-off relay

Faulty starter clutch

Battery

Faulty battery

9 — 2

TRBL

SHTG

STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING/POOR IDLE SPEED

PERFORMANCE/POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

COMPRESSION SYSTEM

Cylinder and cylinder head

Loose spark plug

Loose cylinder head or cylinder

Broken cylinder head gasket

Broken cylinder gasket

Worn, damaged or seized cylinder

Valve, camshaft and crankshaft

Improperly sealed valve

Improperly contacted valve and valve seat

Improper valve timing

Broken valve spring

Seized camshaft

Seized crankshaft

Piston and piston rings

Improperly installed piston ring

Worn, fatigued or broken piston ring

Seized piston ring

Seized or damaged piston

Crankcase and crankshaft

Improperly seated crankcase

Seized crankshaft

Valve train

Improperly adjusted valve clearance

Improperly adjusted valve timing

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE

Carburetor

Improperly returned starter plunger

Loose pilot jet

Clogged pilot jet

Clogged pilot air jet

Improperly adjusted idle speed

(Throttle stop screw)

Improper throttle cable play

Flooded carburetor

Electrical system

Faulty spark plug

Faulty CDI unit

Faulty pickup coil

Faulty ignition coil

Valve train

Improperly adjusted valve clearance

Air filter

Clogged air filter element

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

Refer to “STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING” and “POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE-

VALVE TRAIN”.

Carburetor

Improper jet needle clip position

Improperly adjusted fuel level

Clogged or loose main jet

Deteriorated or contaminated fuel

Air filter

Clogged air filter element

9 — 3

TRBL

SHTG

FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING/

CLUTCH SLIPPING/DRAGGING

FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING

HARD SHIFTING

Refer to “CLUTCH DRAGGING”.

SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE

Shift shaft

Bent shift shaft

Shift drum and shift fork

Groove jammed with impurities

Seized shift fork

Bent shift fork guide bar

Transmission

Seized transmission gear

Jammed impurities

Incorrectly assembled transmission

Shift guide

Broken shift guide

JUMP-OUT GEAR

Shift shaft

Improperly adjusted shift lever position

Improperly returned stopper lever

Shift fork

Worn shift fork

Shift drum

Improper thrust play

Worn shift drum groove

Transmission

Worn gear dog

CLUTCH SLIPPING/DRAGGING

CLUTCH SLIPPING

Clutch

Loose clutch spring

Fatigued clutch spring

Worn friction plate

Worn clutch plate

Incorrectly assembled clutch

Engine oil

Low oil level

Improper quality (low viscosity)

Deterioration

CLUTCH DRAGGING

Clutch

Warped pressure plate

Unevenly tensioned clutch springs

Match marks not aligned

Loose clutch boss nut

Burnt primary driven gear bushing

Bent clutch plate

Swollen friction plate

Broken clutch boss

Transmission oil

High oil level

Improper quality (high viscosity)

Deterioration

9 — 4

TRBL

SHTG

OVERHEATING/OVER COOLING/

FAULTY BRAKE

OVERHEATING

OVERHEATING

Ignition system

Improper spark plug gap

Improper spark plug heat range

Faulty CDI unit

Fuel system

Improper carburetor main jet

(improper setting)

Improper fuel level

Clogged air filter element

Compression system

Heavy carbon deposit

Engine oil

Improper oil level

Improper oil viscosity

Inferior oil quality

Brake

Brake drag

Cooling system

Low coolant level

Clogged or damaged radiator

Damaged or faulty water pump

Thermostat stays closed

OVER COOLING

COOLING SYSTEM

Thermostat

Thermostat stays open

FAULTY BRAKE

POOR BRAKING EFFECT

Disc brake

Worn brake pads

Worn disc

Air in brake fluid

Leaking brake fluid

Faulty master cylinder kit cup

Faulty caliper kit seal

Loose union bolt

Broken brake hose and pipe

Oily or greasy disc/brake pads

Improper brake fluid level

9 — 5

TRBL

SHTG

SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION

MALFUNCTION

Bent or damaged damper rod

Damaged oil seal lip

Fatigued shock absorber spring

SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION/

UNSTABLE HANDLING/LIGHTING SYSTEM

UNSTABLE HANDLING

UNSTABLE HANDLING

Handlebar

Improperly installed or bent

Steering

Incorrect toe-in

Bent steering stem

Improperly installed steering stem

Damaged bearing or bearing race

Bent tie rods

Deformed steering knuckles

Tires

Uneven tire pressures on both sides

Incorrect tire pressure

Uneven tire wear

Wheels

Deformed wheel

Loose bearing

Bent or loose wheel axle

Excessive wheel runout

Frame

Bent

Damaged frame

Swingarm

Worn bearing or bushing

Bent or damaged

LIGHTING SYSTEM

HEADLIGHT DARK

Improper bulb

Too many electric accessories

Hard charging (broken charging coil and/or

faulty rectifier/regulator)

Incorrect connection

Improperly grounded

Poor contacts (main or lights switch)

Bulb life expired

BULB BURNT OUT

Improper bulb

Faulty battery

Faulty rectifier/regulator

Improperly grounded

Faulty main and/or lights switch

Bulb life expired

YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.

2500 SHINGAI IWATA SHIZUOKA JAPAN

PRINTED IN U.S.A.

YFM660R WIRING DIAGRAM

1AC magneto

2Rectifier/regulator

3Main switch

4Battery

5Fuse

6Starter relay

7Starter motor

8Clutch switch

9Park switch

0CDI unit

AIgnition coil

BSpark plug

CSpeed sensor

DCircuit breaker (fan motor)

EThermo switch 1

FFan motor

GCoolant temperature warning light

HReverse indicator light

INeutral indicator light

JNeutral switch

KReverse switch

LDiode

MThermo switch 2

NHandlebar switch (left)

OLights switch

PEngine stop switch

QStart switch

RHeadlight

STail/brake light

TRear brake switch

UFront brake switch

COLOR CODE

B …………Black

Br………..Brown

G…………Green

L………….Blue

O…………Orange

P …………Pink

R….……..Red

Sb ……….Sky blue

W ………..White

Y …………Yellow

B/W……..Black/White

B/Y………Black/Yellow

Br/L……..Brown/Blue

Br/R …….Brown/Red

Br/W…….Brown/White

G/L………Green/Blue

G/W……..Green/White

G/Y………Green/Yellow

L/B ………Blue/Black

L/G………Blue/Green

L/R ………Blue/Red

L/W ……..Blue/White

L/Y ………Blue/Yellow

O/R ……..Orange/Red

R/B…….. Red/Black

R/W……. Red/White

R/Y…….. Red/Yellow

W/B ……. White/Black

W/G……. White/Green

W/L ……. White/Blue

W/R……. White/Red

Y/B …….. Yellow/Black

ЛенМото

4-я Красноармейская, 2А
Санкт-Петербург, 190005
Email: info@lenmoto.ru
Телефон: +7 (921) 930-81-18
Телефон: +7 (911) 928-08-06

Компания ЛенМото

Запчасти, аксессуары, экипировка, тюнинг для мотоциклов, скутеров, квадроциклов, снегоходов, багги, гидроциклов, катеров и лодочных моторов.

Подпишитесь на наши новости

Подписаться

Detail Specifications:

2214/2214668-raptor_yfm660rr.pdf file (08 Jan 2023)

Accompanying Data:

Yamaha RAPTOR YFM660RR Atv, Offroad Vehicle PDF Owner’s Manual (Updated: Sunday 8th of January 2023 07:31:17 AM)

Rating: 4.4 (rated by 2 users)

Compatible devices: YFM350XP, EFM600 GRIZZLY, RX10GTW, FZ45YSXG, GRIZZLY 350 YFM35FGDZ, GRIZZLY 350 YFM35GTXG, RX10GTL, FX10RTRSZ.

Recommended Documentation:

Text Version of Owner’s Manual

(Ocr-Read Summary of Contents, UPD: 08 January 2023)

Recommended Instructions:

Mirada Tandem, BELL 206B 400W, G504, TP550L, KX-TCA155AL, 6BARM

  • YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.PRINTED ON RECYCLED PAPERPRINTED IN JAPAN2002·4–1.6×1 !This ATV should not be ridden by anyone under 12 years of age.OWNER’S MANUAL5TH-28199-11YFM80WRREAD THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY!It contains important safety information.LIT-11626-16-07(E)wImproper ATV use can result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH.qWARNINGALWAYS USEAN APPROVEDHELMET ANDPROTECTI …

    RAPTOR YFM80WR 146

  • DIC183YFM350TFOWNER’S MANUALMANUEL DU PROPRIÉTAIREMANUAL DEL PROPIETARIOB14-F8199-61READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY!It contains important safety information.LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT CE MANUEL!Il comprend d’importantes informations de sécurité.¡LEA ESTE MANUAL ATENTAMENTE!Contiene indicaciones importantes acerca de la seguridad. …

    GRIZZLY 350 YFM350TF 140

  • Owner’s Manual for Maintenance and SafetyPantone 419CRead this manual carefully. It contains important safety information.Adult supervision is required at all times.Operation is prohibited for anyone under 6 years of age.OUTLAW 502018 …

    50 outlaw 203

Additional Information:

Popular Right Now:
Operating Impressions, Questions and Answers:

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Dr c tuna pferde balsam инструкция по применению
  • Соната 2008 руководство по эксплуатации
  • Урсосан цена в екатеринбурге инструкция по применению цена
  • Циклим витамины 45 инструкция по применению цена отзывы побочные эффекты
  • Кальций магний плюс цинк солгар отзывы инструкция по применению